Carbonite Ultra User Manual v3.0
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Carbonite UltraUser Manual
v3.0
Thank You For ChoosingRoss
You've made a great choice. We expect you will be veryhappy with your purchase of Ross Technology.Our mission is to:1. Provide a Superior Customer Experience
• offer the best product quality and support
2. Make Cool Practical Technology• develop great products that customers love
Ross has become well known for the Ross Video Codeof Ethics. It guides our interactions and empowers ouremployees. I hope you enjoy reading it below.If anything at all with your Ross experience does not liveup to your expectations be sure to reach out to us [email protected].
David RossCEO, Ross [email protected]
Ross Video Code of EthicsAny company is the sum total of the people that makethings happen. At Ross, our employees are a specialgroup. Our employees truly care about doing a great joband delivering a high quality customer experience everyday. This code of ethics hangs on the wall of all RossVideo locations to guide our behavior:1. We will always act in our customers' best interest.2. We will do our best to understand our customers'
requirements.3. We will not ship crap.4. We will be great to work with.5. We will do something extra for our customers, as
an apology, when something big goes wrong andit's our fault.
6. We will keep our promises.7. We will treat the competition with respect.8. We will cooperate with and help other friendly
companies.9. We will go above and beyond in times of crisis. If
there's no one to authorize the required action intimes of company or customer crisis - do what you
know in your heart is right. (You may renthelicopters if necessary.)
ii • Thank You For Choosing Ross — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Document Information• Ross Part Number: 4841DR-110-03• Release Date: October, 2019.• Equipment: This document applies to the Carbonite
Ultra frame and Carbonite Black control panels.
Copyright©2019 Ross Video Limited, Ross®, MiniME™, and anyrelated marks are trademarks or registered trademarks ofRoss Video Limited. All other trademarks are theproperty of their respective companies. PATENTSISSUED and PENDING. All rights reserved. No part ofthis publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form or by any means,mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,without the prior written permission of Ross Video.While every precaution has been taken in the preparationof this document, Ross Video assumes no responsibilityfor errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumedfor damages resulting from the use of the informationcontained herein.Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows XP® are eitherregistered trademarks or trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and/or other countries.Macintosh®, and OS X® are trademarks of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other countries.Google Chrome™, Google®, and the Google logo areregistered trademarks of Google Inc.
PatentsPatent numbers US 7,034,886; US 7,508,455; US7,602,446; US 7,802,802 B2; US 7,834,886; US7,914,332; US 8,307,284; US 8,407,374 B2; US8,499,019 B2; US 8,519,949 B2; US 8,743,292 B2; USD752,530 S; GB 2,419,119 B; GB 2,447,380 B; and otherpatents pending.
Important Regulatory and SafetyNotices to Service Personnel
Before using this product and any associated equipment,refer to the “ Important Safety Instructions ” listedin the front of this manual to avoid personnel injury andto prevent product damage.Product may require specific equipment, and/orinstallation procedures to be carried out to satisfy certainregulatory compliance requirements. Notices have beenincluded in this publication to call attention to thesespecific requirements.
Symbol MeaningsProtective Earth: This symbol identifies a ProtectiveEarth (PE) terminal, which is provided for connectionof the supply system's protective earth (green orgreen/yellow) conductor.
Important: This symbol on the equipment refers youto important operating and maintenance (servicing)instructions within the Product Manual Documentation.Failure to heed this information may present a majorrisk of damage or injury to persons or equipment.
Warning: The symbol with the word “ Warning ”within the equipment manual indicates a potentiallyhazardous situation which, if not avoided, could resultin death or serious injury.
CAUTION: The symbol with the word “ Caution ”within the equipment manual indicates a potentiallyhazardous situation which, if not avoided, may resultin minor or moderate injury. It may also be used toalert against unsafe practices.
Warning Hazardous Voltages: This symbol isintended to alert the user to the presence ofuninsulated “ dangerous voltage ” within the productenclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude toconstitute a risk of shock to persons.
ESD Susceptibility: This symbol is used to alert theuser that an electrical or electronic device or assemblyis susceptible to damage from an ESD event.
Important Safety Instructions
1.Warning: Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.3. Heed all warnings.4. Follow all instructions.5. Do not use this apparatus near water.6. Clean only with a dry cloth.7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.8. Do not install near heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (includingamplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized orgrounding-type plug. A polarized plug has twoblades with one wider than the other. A groundingtype plug has two blades and a third groundingprong. The third prong is provided for your safety.If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,consult an electrician for replacement of the obsoleteoutlet.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Document Information • iii
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on orpinched, particularly at plugs, conveniencereceptacles, and the point where they exit from theapparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by themanufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms orwhen unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.Servicing is required when the apparatus has beendamaged in any way, such as when the power-supplycord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled orobjects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatushas been exposed to rain or moisture, does notoperate normally, or has been dropped.
14. Do not expose this apparatus to dripping orsplashing, and ensure that no objects filled withliquids, such as vases, are placed on the apparatus.
15. To completely disconnect this apparatus from theAC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plugfrom the AC receptacle.
16. The mains plug of the power supply cord shallremain readily operable.
17.Warning: Indoor Use: To reduce the risk of fireor electric shock, do not expose this apparatusto rain or moisture.
18. The safe operation of this product requires that aprotective earth connection be provided. Agrounding conductor in the equipment's supply cordprovides this protective earth. To reduce the risk ofelectrical shock to the operator and servicepersonnel, this ground conductor must be connectedto an earthed ground.
19.Warning: This apparatus, when equipped withmultiple power supplies, can generate highleakage currents. To reduce the risk of electricshock, ensure that each individual supply cordis connected to its own separate branch circuitwith an earth connection.
20.CAUTION: These service instructions are foruse by qualified service personnel only. Toreduce the risk of electric shock, do not performany servicing other than that contained in theoperating instructions unless you are qualifiedto do so.
21. Service barriers within this product are intended toprotect the operator and service personnel fromhazardous voltages. For continued safety, replaceall barriers after servicing.
22. Certain parts of this equipment still present a safetyhazard with the power switch in the OFF position.
To avoid electrical shock, disconnect all A/C powercords from the chassis' rear appliance connectorsbefore servicing.
23. This product contains safety critical parts, which, ifincorrectly replaced, may present a risk of fire orelectrical shock. Components contained within theproduct's power supplies and power supply area arenot intended to be customer-serviced and should bereturned to the factory for repair.
24. To reduce the risk of fire, replacement fuses mustbe the same type and rating.
25. Use only power cords specified for this product andcertified for the country of use.
26. The safe operation of this equipment requires thatthe user heed and adhere to all installation andservicing instruction contained within theequipment's Setup Manuals.
27.Warning: This product includes an “ EthernetPort ” which allows this product to be connectedto a local area network (LAN). Only connect tonetworks that remain inside the building. Do notconnect to networks that go outside the building.
28.CAUTION: This apparatus contains a Lithiumbattery, which if replaced incorrectly, or with anincorrect type, may cause an explosion. Replaceonly with a CR2032 coin type lithium battery.Dispose of used batteries according to themanufacturer's instruction by qualified servicepersonnel.
EMC Notices
United States of America — FCC Part 15This equipment has been tested and found to complywith the limits for a class A Digital device, pursuant topart 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed toprovide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference when the equipment is operated in acommercial environment. This equipment generates,uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with the instructionmanual, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. Operation of this equipment in aresidential area is likely to cause harmful interference inwhich case the user will be required to correct theinterference at his own expense.
Important: Changes or modifications to thisequipment not expressly approved by Ross VideoLimited could void the user's authority to operate thisequipment.
iv • Document Information — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
CanadaThis Class “ A ” digital apparatus complies withCanadian ICES-003.Cet appareil numérique de la classe “ A ” est conformea la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
EuropeThis equipment is in compliance with the essentialrequirements and other relevant provisions of CEDirective 93/68/EEC.
InternationalThis equipment has been tested toCISPR 22:1997 alongwith amendments A1:2000 and A2:2002, and found tocomply with the limits for a Class A Digital device.
Important: This is a Class A product. In domesticenvironments, this product may cause radiointerference, in which case the user may have to takeadequate measures.
General Handling Guidelines• Careful handling, using proper ESD precautions, must
be observed.• Power down the system before PCB removal.
A Word About Static DischargeThroughout the many procedures in this manual, pleaseobserve all static discharge precautions.
CAUTION: Avoid handling the switcher circuit boardsin high static environments such as carpeted areas,and when synthetic fiber clothing is worn. Touch theframe to dissipate static charge before removingboards from the frame, and exercise proper groundingprecautions when working on circuit boards. Exerciseproper grounding precautions when working on circuitboards.
Warranty and Repair PolicyRoss Video Limited (Ross) warrants its switchers andrelated options, to be free from defects under normal useand service for a period of ONE YEAR from the date ofshipment. Fader handle assemblies are warranted for thelife of the product. If an item becomes defective withinthe warranty period Ross will repair or replace thedefective item, as determined solely by Ross.Warranty repairs will be conducted at Ross, with allshipping FOB Ross dock. If repairs are conducted at thecustomer site, reasonable out-of-pocket charges willapply. At the discretion of Ross, and on a temporary loanbasis, plug in circuit boards or other replacement partsmay be supplied free of charge while defective items
undergo repair. Return packing, shipping, and specialhandling costs are the responsibility of the customer.Software upgrades for switchers may occur from time totime, and are determined by Ross Video. The upgradesare posted on the Ross Video website, and are free ofcharge for the life of the switcher.This warranty is void if products are subjected to misuse,neglect, accident, improper installation or application,or unauthorized modification.In no event shall Ross Video Limited be liable for direct,indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages(including loss of profit). Implied warranties, includingthat of merchantability and fitness for a particularpurpose, are expressly limited to the duration of thiswarranty.This warranty is TRANSFERABLE to subsequentowners, subject to Ross Video's notification of changeof ownership.
Environmental Information
Waste Electrical and Electronic EquipmentDirective (WEEE Directive)
The equipment that you purchased required theextraction and use of natural resources for itsproduction. It may contain hazardous substances thatcould impact health and the environment.To avoid the potential release of those substances intothe environment and to diminish the need for theextraction of natural resources, Ross Video encouragesyou to use the appropriate take-back systems. Thesesystems will reuse or recycle most of the materials fromyour end-of-life equipment in an environmentally friendlyand health conscious manner.The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you to usethese systems.
If you need more information on the collection, reuse,and recycling systems, please contact your local orregional waste administration.You can also contact Ross Video for more informationon the environmental performances of our products.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Document Information • v
Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical andElectronic Products (China RoHS)
Ross Video Limited has reviewed all components andprocesses for compliance to:“ Management Methods for the Restriction of the Use ofHazardous Substances in Electrical and ElectronicProducts ” also known as China RoHS.The “ Environmentally Friendly Use Period ” (EFUP)and Hazardous Substance Tables have been establishedfor all products. We are currently updating all of ourProduct Manuals.The Hazardous substances tables are available on ourwebsite at: http://www.rossvideo.com/about-ross/company-profile/green-practices/china-rohs.html
电器电子产品中有害物质的使用Ross Video Limited 按照以下的标准对所有组件和流程进行了审查：“ 电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法 ” 也被称为中国RoHS。所有产品都具有 “ 环保使用期限 ” (EFUP）和有害物质表。目前，我们正在 更新我们所有的产品手册。有害物质表在我们的网站：http://www.rossvideo.com/about-ross/company-profile/green-practices/china-rohs.html
Company AddressRoss Video Limited — 8 John Street Iroquois, Ontario,Canada, K0E 1K0RossVideo Incorporated— P.O. Box 880, Ogdensburg,New York, USA, 13669-0880
(+1)613-652-4886General Business Office:
(+1)613-652-4425Fax:
1-844-652-0645Toll Free TechnicalSupport (North America):
+800 1005 0100Toll Free TechnicalSupport (International):
(+1)613-652-4886Technical Support:
(+1)613-349-0006After Hours Emergency:
[email protected] (Support):
[email protected] (General):
www.rossvideo.comWebsite
Technical SupportAt Ross Video, we take pride in the quality of ourproducts, but if a problem does occur, help is as close asthe nearest telephone.Our 24-Hour Hot Line service ensures you have accessto technical expertise around the clock. After-salesservice and technical support are provided directly byRoss Video personnel. During business hours (easternstandard time), technical support personnel are availableby telephone. Outside of normal business hours and onweekends, a direct emergency technical support phoneline is available. If the technical support personnel whois on call does not answer this line immediately, a voicemessage can be left and the call will be returned shortly.Our Technical support staff are available to react to anyproblem and to do whatever is necessary to ensurecustomer satisfaction.
Supporting DocumentationRoss Video provides a wide variety of helpfuldocumentation for the setup and support of yourequipment. Most of this documentation can be foundeither on the Product Resources disk that came with yourequipment, on the Ross Video website(www.rossvideo.com), or on the Ross Video Communitysite (discussions.rossvideo.com/)• Carbonite Online Help for DashBoard — visit
help.rossvideo.com/carbonite• Manual (4841DR-110) — setup and operation for
the Carbonite Ultra switchers• Ultra QuickStart Poster (4841DR-200) — setup
information and specifications for the Carbonite Ultraframes
• Upgrade Notes (4841DR-500) — upgradeinstructions, new features, and known issues for agiven software version
• Software Licenses (4841DR-502) — third-partysoftware licences
• Carbonite Multilingual Safety Information(4802DR-503) — translated product safetyinformation
• Device Setup (help.rossvideo.com/carbonite-device)— setup information for controlling external devicesfrom the switcher
vi • Document Information — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Contents
Features.............................................................11Clean Feed Output................................................................11Custom Controls....................................................................11Device Control.......................................................................11DVE (Fly Key)........................................................................11Effects Dissolve.....................................................................11General Purpose Interface (GPI)...........................................11LiveEDL.................................................................................11Matte/Wash Generator..........................................................11ME Effect System..................................................................11Media-Store...........................................................................11MediaManager......................................................................12MediaWipe............................................................................12Clip Player.............................................................................12MemoryAI Recall Mode.........................................................12Memory System....................................................................12MiniME™................................................................................12I/O Processor........................................................................12High Dynamic Range (HDR) and Wide Color Gamut
(WCG) Conversion.........................................................12MultiScreen...........................................................................13MultiViewer............................................................................13OverDrive® Caprica Support..................................................13Pattern and Matte/Wash Generators.....................................13Tally Outputs..........................................................................13UltraChrome..........................................................................13XPression Live CG................................................................13
Control Panel Overview...................................15Carbonite Black Control Panels............................................15CB9 Control Panel.................................................................16
Menu System....................................................17Menu Navigation...................................................................17Auto-Follow Menus................................................................17
Switcher Basics................................................18Audio and Video Processing.................................................18
Video Processing and Flow...................................18Audio Processing and Flow...................................18
Video Sources.......................................................................18To Select a Source on a Bus..................................19
Video Layering......................................................................19Re-Entry.................................................................19FlexiClean Clean Feed..........................................20
Video Preview........................................................................20MultiViewer............................................................20
ME Copy................................................................................20To Copy an ME Using the Control Panel...............20To Copy an ME Using DashBoard.........................20
DashBoard........................................................21Switcher Status in DashBoard...............................................21Configuration.........................................................................21Live Assist.............................................................................21
PaneLINK...............................................................21Custom Controls....................................................................21ViewControl...........................................................................21MediaManager......................................................................22Help.......................................................................................22Panel.....................................................................................22
Menu Area.............................................................22User Area...............................................................22Control Area...........................................................23Bus Area................................................................23
Ultritouch...........................................................24
ViewControl (HD Only).....................................25ViewControl Overview...........................................................25
Custom Control Buttons.........................................25Bus Selection Buttons............................................25Keyer Transition Buttons........................................25Transition Buttons..................................................25
Custom Control Button Setup................................................26To Set up the Custom Control Buttons..................26
Connecting ViewControl........................................................26To Set Up the MultiViewer for
ViewControl....................................................27
Transitions........................................................28Performing Transitions..........................................................28
Understanding the Transition Menu.......................28To Perform a Transition..........................................28To Override the Pre-Delay Setting.........................29To Abort a Transition During the
Pre-Delay........................................................29Cut Transitions......................................................................29Dissolve Transitions..............................................................29
To Set Up a Dissolve..............................................29WhiteFlash............................................................................30
To Set Up a WhiteFlash.........................................30Wipe Transitions....................................................................30
To Set Up a Wipe...................................................30To Apply a Border to a Pattern...............................31
DVE Transitions.....................................................................31To Set Up a DVE Transition...................................31
MediaWipe Transitions..........................................................32To Set Up a MediaWipe.........................................32To Set the MediaWipe Layer..................................33
Transition Limits....................................................................33To Set Up a Transition Limit...................................33
Patterns, Washes, and Mattes.........................34Patterns.................................................................................34
To Set Up a Pattern................................................34
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Contents • vii
Washes..................................................................................34To Set Up a Wash..................................................34
Mattes....................................................................................34To Set Up a Matte Color.........................................35
Keying................................................................36Understanding the Keying Menu...........................................36Self Keys...............................................................................37
To Set Up a Self Key..............................................37Auto Select Keys...................................................................37
To Set Up an Auto Select Key................................37UltraChrome 2 Chroma Key..................................................38
To Select the Chroma Key on a Keyer...................38To Set Up a Chroma Key.......................................38
DVE Keys..............................................................................40To Set Up a DVE Key.............................................40To Apply a DVE to a Key (Fly Key)........................41To Apply a Border/Edge Softness to a DVE
Key..................................................................41Show Alpha...........................................................................42Masks....................................................................................42
To Pattern Mask a Key (SD/HD Only)....................42To Box Mask a Key................................................42
Split Keys..............................................................................43To Set Up a Split Key.............................................43
Key Copy...............................................................................43To Copy a Key........................................................43
Key Swap..............................................................................43To Perform a Key Swap.........................................44
Memory Functions............................................45Memory Access Mode...........................................................45
To Set the Memory Access Mode..........................45Storing Memories..................................................................45
To Store a Memory on DashBoard........................45To Store a Memory on the CB1 and CB2..............45To Store a Memory on the Effects Memory
Area................................................................45To Store a Memory on the Global Memory
Area................................................................46Recalling Memories...............................................................46
To Recall a Memory on DashBoard.......................46To Recall a Memory on the CB1 and
CB2.................................................................46To Recall a Memory on the Effects Memory
Area................................................................47To Recall a Memory on the Global Memory
Area................................................................47Memory Recall Mode............................................................47
To Set Up the Recall Mode MemoryAttribute..........................................................47
To Set the Effects Duration....................................48Memory Attributes.................................................................48
To Set the Memory Attributes.................................48Deleting a Memory or Bank...................................................49
To Delete a Memory...............................................49Clear Memories.....................................................................49
To Clear the Memory Registers.............................49
Switcher Sets....................................................50To Store a Set........................................................................50To Load a Set........................................................................50
Media-Store.......................................................51Working With Media-Store Animations..................................51Working With Media-Store Audio..........................................51
Media-Store Audio Output.....................................51Loading Stills or Animations..................................................52
Media-Store File Specifications.............................52To Load a Still or Animation...................................52
Media-Store Capture.............................................................53To Capture a Still From the Panel..........................53To Capture a Still from DashBoard........................53
Media-Store Attributes...........................................................54To Set Media-Store File Attributes.........................54To Lock a Media Number Place and
Bank................................................................55MediaManager......................................................................55
Using MediaManager ............................................55The MediaManager Window..................................55
Clip Player.........................................................57Clip Specifications.................................................................57Clip Player Interface..............................................................57To Load a Clip.......................................................................58
Custom Controls..............................................60Custom Control Setup...........................................................60
To Set Custom Control Options.............................60Recording Custom Controls..................................................60
To Record a Custom Control..................................60Special Functions..................................................................60
To Insert a Special Event into a CustomControl............................................................61
Running a Custom Control....................................................61To Run a Custom Control.......................................62
Editing a Custom Control......................................................62To Edit a Custom Control ......................................62To Edit a CC From DashBoard..............................62Custom Control Events..........................................63
Naming Custom Controls....................................................105To Name a Custom Control..................................105
Deleting Custom Controls...................................................106To Delete a Custom Control.................................106
Copying and Pasting Custom Controls...............................106To Copy and Paste a Custom Control.................106
Network Connections.....................................107Frame Network Setup (Ethernet)........................................107
To Connect to the Frame.....................................107To Change the IP Address...................................107
Panel Network Setup...........................................................107To Configure the Network Setting........................107To Assign a Custom Name..................................108
viii • Contents — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
FTP Connection..................................................................108To Create an FTP Connection.............................108
Default IP Addresses...........................................................108
Video Reference.............................................109Supported Reference Formats............................................109UHDTV1 Mode....................................................................109
To Set the UHDTV1 Switcher Mode....................110Reference and Video Mode Setup......................................110
To Set a Video Mode............................................110Output Reference Synchronizers........................................111
To Set Up an Output Reference Sync..................111Aspect Ratio Conversion.....................................................111
Full.......................................................................111Zoom....................................................................111Letterbox..............................................................111Pillarbox...............................................................112
Switching Field (SD/HD Only).............................................112To Set the Switching Field....................................112
Video Input Setup...........................................113UHDTV1 Inputs...................................................................113Auto Key Setup...................................................................113
To Set Up an Auto Key Association.....................113Source Names.....................................................................113
To Set Up a Source Name...................................114To Assign a TSL ID to a Video Input....................114
Control Panel Button Inserts...............................................114To Install a Button Insert......................................114
Bus Maps............................................................................115To Create a Bus Map...........................................115To Reset the Bus Map..........................................116
GPI Device Control..............................................................116To Assign a GPI to a Video Source......................116
Video Output Setup........................................117UHDTV1 Outputs................................................................117Output Sources...................................................................117
To Assign a Source to an Output.........................117Ancillary Data......................................................................118
To Strip or Pass Ancillary Data............................118FlexiClean Clean Feed........................................................118
To Set Up Clean Feed..........................................118External Layer Mode...........................................................118
To Set Up Layer Mode.........................................118On-Air Setting......................................................................119
To Set the On-Air Status for an Output................119Tallies..................................................................................119
To Set Up a Tally..................................................119
MultiViewer......................................................120MultiViewer Output Formats................................................120To Set Up a I/O MultiViewer................................................120To Set Up a Video Processor MultiViewer...........................121To Set Up a MultiViewer Clock............................................122
MultiScreen.....................................................124MultiScreen Video Processor Setup....................................124To Set Up MultiScreen.........................................................125To Set Up a Pre-Tiled Source..............................................126
I/O Processors................................................127To Assign an I/O Processor to an Input or Output (SD/HD
Only).............................................................................127Frame Sync and Format Conversion..................................127
Supported FSFC Video Formats .........................127Input FSFC...........................................................129Output FSFC........................................................130
Color Correction..................................................................130To Assign a Color Corrector to a Source
(UHDTV1 Only).............................................131Proc Amp Color Correction..................................131RGB Color Correction .........................................132High Dynamic Range (HDR) and Wide Color
Gamut (WCG) Conversion............................133
Switcher Personality......................................136Auto Remove Key...............................................................136
To Set the Auto Remove Key Behavior...............136Auto Trans Second Press....................................................136
To Set the Auto Trans Second PressBehavior........................................................136
Background Double-Press..................................................136To Set the Background Double-Press
Behavior........................................................136Color Schemes....................................................................136
To Use a Unique Color for Each Keyer................136To Select a Panel Color Scheme.........................137To Create a Custom Panel Color
Scheme.........................................................137To Set the Brightness of the Control Panel
Buttons..........................................................137Double-Press Rate..............................................................137
To Set the Double-Press Rate.............................137Editor Mode.........................................................................137
To Set the Switcher to Editor Mode.....................137Memory Bank Button Behavior............................................137
To Set the Bank Button Behavior.........................137ME Select............................................................................138
To Set the ME Select Behavior............................138Next Button Secondary Function.........................................138
To Set the NEXT Button SecondaryFunction........................................................138
Next Transition Reset..........................................................138To Set the Next Transition Reset
Behavior........................................................138Next Transition Toggle.........................................................138
To Set the Next Trans Toggle...............................138Power-Save Mode...............................................................138
To Set the Power Save Mode and Timer.............138Roll GPO/Roll Clip...............................................................139
To Set the Roll GPO/Clip Behavior......................139Shift Toggle..........................................................................139
To Set the Shift Toggle.........................................139
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Contents • ix
Transition Rate Units...........................................................139To Set the Units Used for Transition
Rates............................................................139Undo Memory Recall...........................................................139
To Turn Undo Memory Recall Off........................139User Buttons........................................................................139
To Set A User Button...........................................139
Software Options............................................141To Add a Software Option...................................................141
GPI Control......................................................142GPI Trigger Types...............................................................142GPI Setup............................................................................142
To Set Up a GPI Input..........................................142To Set Up a GPI Output.......................................142
GPI Output Triggers............................................................143To Assign a GPI Output to a Video
Source..........................................................143To Set a GPI to Be Triggered Manually...............143
Live Edit Decision Lists.................................144LiveEDL Setup....................................................................144
To Set the LiveEDL Behavior...............................144Timecode Setup..................................................................144
To Confirm External LTC Signal...........................144To Set Up Communications with a
TSC-9902.....................................................144To Set the LTC Timecode Source........................144
LiveEDL Data Capture........................................................145To Start Capturing EDL Data...............................145To Stop Capturing and Save EDL Data...............145
MultiPanel........................................................146To Set Up MultiPanel Permissions......................................146
Diagnostics and Calibration..........................147Switcher Information and Logs............................................147
Switcher Status....................................................147To View the Software Version..............................147To Copy Logs To a USB.......................................147
Calibration...........................................................................147To Calibrate the Switcher.....................................147
System Real-Time Clock/Date............................................148To Set the System Real-Time Clock....................148To Set the System Date.......................................148
Diagnostics..........................................................................148Frame DIP Switches............................................148Control Panel DIP Switches ................................148To Run the Control Panel Test.............................148To Run the LED Test............................................148To Run the Display Test.......................................148To Run the Tally Test............................................148To Run the GPI Input Test....................................149To Run the GPI Output Test.................................149
Error Messages...................................................................149
Switcher Soft Reset........................................150Soft Reset............................................................................150
To Reset the Switcher Software...........................150Custom Reset Settings........................................................150
To Save a Custom Reset Setting.........................150To Load a Custom Reset Setting.........................150
Factory Default Settings......................................................150To Factory Reset the Switcher.............................150
Resetting Individual Components........................................151
Specifications.................................................152Resources...........................................................................152Hardware Weights...............................................................152Environmental Characteristics.............................................152Video Input Specifications...................................................152Video Output Specifications................................................153Audio Specifications............................................................153Jitter.....................................................................................153System Timing.....................................................................153Power Consumption — Control Panel.................................154Power Consumption — Frame............................................154
Ports................................................................155Serial Port............................................................................155GPI Port...............................................................................155Tally Port..............................................................................155AES Port..............................................................................156LTC Port..............................................................................156
Glossary.............................................157
Index...................................................160
x • Contents — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
FeaturesThank you for buying a Ross Video Carbonite UltraSeries Multi-Definition Live Production Switcher. TheUltra series builds on the Ross Video reputation fordesigning switchers that fit the needs of any productionenvironment.
Clean Feed OutputClean feed is typically used for bilingual and live-to-tapeproductions. It provides a second Program output that isderived from a different location than the standardprogram output. A frequent application is the recordingof shows for later airing without call-in phone numbersinserted.The clean feed output can come from before or betweenthe keyers.
KEY 1 KEY 2PGM/PST KEY 3 KEY 4
Custom ControlsThis feature brings the power of macros to the switcheroperator. Button presses, menu selections, eventcommands, or even the switcher state can be recorded toa custom control with pauses or holds between the events.A simple button press can play these events back again.Step through complex show openings as easily aspressing Custom Control buttons 1, 2, then 3.
Device ControlThe switcher can control a number of external devices,such as video servers and robotic cameras. For a completelist of supported devices, and information on how to setup and control these devices, visit the Ross Video website(rossvideo.com/production-switchers/carbonite/interface-list).
DVE (Fly Key)The advanced 2D DVE comes standard with eachswitcher, and can be used for performing over theshoulder, or picture in picture shots. This allows all keytypes to be zoomed, cropped, and repositionedhorizontally and vertically to create the look you want,or you can use one of the useful pre-built 2D effects toperform 2D background transitions.
Effects DissolveThe Effects Dissolve feature allows you to interpolatefrom one memory to another using a memory recall. Theswitcher will interpolate from the starting memory to the
destination memory, creating a smooth, two key frameeffect.
Only elements such as clip level and pattern position canbe interpolated in the effects dissolve. Other elements,such as crosspoint selection, pattern, and next transitiondata are recalled first, and then the switcher will slew tothe recalled memory.An effects dissolve can be performed on as manyelements and MEs as required, based on the memory thatis being recalled.
General Purpose Interface (GPI)The switcher is equipped with 24 GPI I/Os that can beassigned as either an input or output independently.The GPI inputs allow the switcher to interface withperipheral equipment such as editors. Each GPI inputcan be used to perform simple editing and switcherfunctions such as fade to black or an auto transition.
LiveEDLEdit Decision Lists (EDL) are files used by non-linearediting (NLE) suites to aid in post-production. Yourswitcher can capture EDL data in a file that you load intoyour NLE suite.For information on using the LiveEDL feature, visit theRoss Video Website (rossvideo.com).
Matte/Wash GeneratorA matte generator and complex wash generator per ME,capable of multi-color washes comes standard. Any oneof the color generators can be assigned to MATTE, orwipe pattern edges. An additional simple color generatoris available for an Aux Bus.
ME Effect SystemThe ME (Multi-level Effect) systems are standard. Thenumber of MEs depends on the chosen switcher model.Each ME provides independent keyers supporting patternmask, box mask, self-key, linear key.
Media-StoreEach channel of Media-Store provides a combined videowith alpha for playout of stills and animations that areavailable switcher-wide, allowing for thousands of full
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Features • 11
screen stills and logos that can be cached and used onthe switcher.Media-Store provides 8 GB of cache. The number ofimages cached increases considerably when smaller,non-full screen images like logos are loaded from USB.
MediaManagerThe MediaManager allows you to easily manage stillsand animations on the switcher in a graphics interface.
MediaWipeA MediaWipe allows you to use an animation, withaudio, from the Media-Store to play over a backgroundor key transition. When the transition starts, the switcherplays the selected animation and audio over top of thebackground and keys that are being transitioned. A cut,dissolve, wipe, or DVE wipe is then performed layeredunder the animation to bring up the next shot when theanimation ends. The audio is played out one of the AESports.
Clip PlayerThe clip player offers a single playout channel forcompressed MPEG-4 AVC (ITU-T H.264) that can beassigned as a source on any bus in the switcher. Basictransport controls can be performed manually from theClip Player page, using custom controls, or throughAMP commands.
MemoryAI Recall ModeWe take the guessing out of memory recalls by ensuringthat a memory recall will not affect what is currentlyon-air. MemoryAI uses the content of the memory toconfigure the Next Transition area and Preview bus forthe background and keyers so that the next transitiontakes the same sources on-air that were on-air in thememory.For example, store a memory that has a key on-air withCAM1 and CAM2 selected on the background. Whenthis memory is recalled normally, it pops the same keyon-air with CAM1 and CAM2 on the background. Whenthe memory is recalled with MemoryAI turned on, CAM1is selected on the preset bus, and CAM2 is selected on akey that is not on-air. The transition area is then set upfor a background transition to bring CAM2 onto thebackground, take any on-air keys off, and take a keyon-air with CAM1.
Memory SystemStorage for 100 complete switcher snapshots per ME,MiniME™, and Canvas comes standard with all switchers.
All of these memories can be stored to a USB mediadrive, providing custom tailored memories for everyoperator and every show.
MiniME™
The MiniME™ is an additional ME that is provided withthe switcher to perform basic dissolves and cuts. EachMiniME™ has keyer, background, and preset buses.Unlike a full ME, the MiniME™ only supports dissolvesand cuts. The MiniME™ shares all the same sources asthe ME.
I/O ProcessorThe Input/Output Video Processors are independent videoprocessing engines that allow you to perform FSFC andcolor correction functions on specific inputs or outputs.Once an I/O Processor has been assigned to an input oroutput, it can be used to frame sync, format convert, andcolor correct.
HighDynamicRange (HDR) andWideColor Gamut (WCG) Conversion
The RGB color correctors are used to convert betweendifferent SDR and HDR ranges and between color gamuts(WCG).
Note: HDR and WCG input conversion can only be applied inUHDTV1 video mode.
Note: You must have available color correctors to be ableperform the HDR/WCG conversion.
HDR and WCG conversion can be applied on the fly toinput video signals, entire buses, or aux bus outputs.To configure the dynamic range and color gamutconversion of input sources you must apply a colorcorrector to the input. This will convert the input sourceto the format that the switcher is operating in. Videosignals can again be converted for individual outputBNCs.Supported Color Gamuts:• BT.709 — color gamut recommended for HD video
signals.• BT.2020 — wide color gamut recommended for
UHDTV1 video signals.Supported Dynamic Ranges• SDR — Standard Dynamic Range.• HLG — Hybrid Log Gamma.• PQ — Perceptual Quantizer.• S-Log3 — Sony® S-Log3.
12 • Features — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
MultiScreenThe MultiScreen is made up of a number of Canvasgenerators. Each Canvas breaks the scene up into separateoutputs (MiniME™ outputs) that can be sent toindependent projectors or displays to make a unifiedpicture. Integrated edge blending allows you tocompensate for the overlap in projector outputs, or theoutside bezel of your display.Each screen in the Canvas output uses a MiniME™ tocreate the background and keys of the output.
MultiViewerEach MultiViewer allows you to view up to 16 videosources, in 45 different layouts, from a single outputBNC. Any video source on the switcher, including MEProgram, Preview, and Media-Store channels, can berouted to any box on the MultiViewer. All boxes on theMultiViewer output include mnemonic source namesand red and green tallies.
Figure 1: HD Layouts
Figure 2: MultiViewer Grid
OverDrive® Caprica SupportUltra can be controlled from OverDrive® using theCaprica interface. This interface allows OverDrive® toperform memory recalls, transitions, and run customcontrols on the switcher. For information on setting upCaprica to interface with the switcher, refer to thedocumentation that came with your Caprica server.It is recommended to have 3 MEs installed to becontrolled by Caprica, but operation is possible with only2 MEs.
Pattern and Matte/Wash GeneratorsA single pattern generator dedicated to wipes comesstandard, and is equipped with 10 classic wipes. Mostwipes can be rotated, bordered, multiplied, aspectized,and repositioned.
Tally OutputsThe switcher has 24 assignable tally relays located in therack frame. Each tally can be assigned to any number ofcombinations of input and output or bus.
UltraChromeThe UltraChrome 2 chroma keyer uses independentchroma key engines to produce the video and alphacomponents of the key. These internal video streams canbe composited in a keyer, or fed out two separate videostreams to an external device, such as a video server.
XPression Live CGSeamlessly combine the creative power of the Ross®
XPression Designer software with the ease of use of yourRoss® switcher. Create stunning still graphics usingXPression Designer, and transfer them directly to anmedia-store channel on the switcher using the RossLinqinterface. Up to two (2) channels with dedicated alphacan be controlled from the XPression Software Client.This feature supports still images only.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Features • 13
Each switcher comes with a single license of XPression.Additional licenses can be ordered.
14 • Features — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Control Panel OverviewThis chapter provides a basic introduction to the controlpanel, including an overview of the different areas onthe control panel, using the menu system, as well as anintroduction to the various ports, and video buses.
Carbonite Black Control PanelsEach Carbonite Black control panel is made up of anumber of distinct areas that control different aspects ofthe switcher. Some of these areas may vary in size orfunction, depending on the control panel you have.
PUSH PUSH PUSH
MULTI
SCN 1STORE
RECALL
ME 2ME 1LOCK
HOME
CC
UP
MENU
BACK
NEXT
(SHIFT)
KEY/AUX/CUSTOM CONTROL
PROGRAM
PRESET
KEY 2
SEL
KEY 1
SEL
KEY 3
SEL
KEY 4
SEL
AUX
2
AUX
1
AUX
3
AUX
4
SHOW
ALPHA
KEY
PV
AUTO
SELECT
SELF
KEY
CHR
KEYDVE
KEY 2
SEL
KEY 1
SEL
KEY 3
SEL
KEY 4
SEL
AUX
2
AUX
1
AUX
3
AUX
4
SHOW
ALPHA
KEY
PV
AUTO
SELECT
SELF
KEY
CHR
KEYDVE
KEY/AUX/CUSTOM CONTROL
PROGRAM
PRESET
AUX
6
AUX
5
AUX
7
AUX
8
BANK
2
BANK
1
BANK
4
BANK
3
KEY 2
SEL
KEY 1
SEL
KEY 3
SEL
KEY 4
SEL
AUX
2
AUX
1
AUX
3
AUX
4
SHOW
ALPHA
KEY
PV
AUTO
SELECT
SELF
KEY
CHR
KEYDVE
AUX
6
AUX
5
AUX
7
AUX
8
BANK
2
BANK
1
BANK
4
BANK
3
STORE 7 8 9 RECALL
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
DISS WIPE DVE MEDIA USERPGM 4 5 6 EFF
RATE
MEMAI 1 2 3 ME
RATE
EFFDISS
BANK 0 ENTERKEY
RATE
TRANSITION 3EFFECTS MEMORY 3
ROLL
CLIP CUTAUTO
TRANSKEY 4CUT
KEY 3CUT
KEY 2CUT
KEY 1CUT
KEY 4AUTO
KEY 3AUTO
KEY 2AUTO
KEY 1AUTO
TRANSITION 2
BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4
DISS WIPE DVE MEDIA USER
STORE 7 8 9 RECALL
PGM 4 5 6 EFFRATE
MEMAI 1 2 3 ME
RATE
EFFDISS
BANK 0 ENTERKEY
RATE
KEY 4CUT
KEY 3CUT
KEY 2CUT
KEY 1CUT
KEY 4AUTO
KEY 3AUTO
KEY 2AUTO
KEY 1AUTO
ROLL
CLIP CUTAUTO
TRANS
EFFECTS MEMORY 2
MiniME
1
MiniME
2
MiniME
3
MiniME
4
MULTI
SCN 2
ME 3
USB1 42
12
1113 1714 16
15
3
7 8
5 6
109
Figure 3: CB2S Control Panel
1. Menu Selection Buttons — These mnemonicbuttons are used to access switcher menus and selectwipe patterns.
2. Global Memory — These buttons are used to storeor recall memories to one or more MEs at the sametime. On the CB1 and CB2 control panels there areonly store and recall buttons for MEs 1 and 2.
3. Main Display and Selection Knobs — The threeselection knobs are used to adjust and select variousmenu items or values. The knobs are rotated tochoose a value, and pressed to make a selection. Themain display shows the menu system of the switcher.
4. Menu Navigation Buttons — These buttons areused to access switcher menus and move back andforth between menus.
5. USB — The USB port on the control panel is notimplemented at this time.
6. Positioner— The positioner is used to position andsize keys in the DVE, control some wipe, border,and wash parameters, as well as control someexternal devices.
7. Key Type Buttons — These buttons are used tochoose the type of key you want to use. Use thesebuttons with the key select buttons to select the keyerand the type of key you want to use.
8. Key Select Buttons — These buttons are used tochoose which keyer is selected. The key type buttonsand key bus follow the selected keyer. These are
user select buttons can be assigned to other functionsif required.
9. ME/Aux Selection Buttons — These buttons areused to assign the control panel row to an ME,MiniME™, chroma key, or Aux. These are user selectbuttons can be assigned to other functions ifrequired.
10. Custom Control Bank Select Buttons — Thesebuttons are used to choose which custom controlbank is selected. The custom control bus follows theselected custom control bank. These are user selectbuttons can be assigned to other functions ifrequired.
11. Mnemonic Displays — The mnemonic displayshows the name of the source, or custom control,assigned to the button directly below it. Themnemonic display-name and color for each videosource or custom control can be adjusted.
12. Video Source Buses— These buses are broken intothe Preset, Program, and Key/Aux/Custom Controlbuses. The Preset bus is the bottom row of sourcebuttons and selects the video source that will betaken on-air with the next background transition.The Program bus is the middle row of source buttonsand selects the video source that is currently on-airon the background. The Key/Aux/Custom Controlbus is the top row of source buttons and selects thevideo source that is chosen on the selected keyer oraux bus, or the custom control that is chosen on theselected custom control bank.
13. Effects Memory — These buttons are used to storeand recall memories on the assigned ME, and toselect the various transition rates used on theswitcher. These buttons are assigned to the ME thatthe panel row has been assigned to.
14. TransitionArea— These buttons are used to selectwhich video source buses will be included in thenext transition and what type of transition will beperformed. The Cut and Auto Trans buttons are usedto perform transitions. The user button is notimplemented at this time.
15. On-Air Lights — These lights glow red to showwhich keyers are currently on-air.
16. Manual Transition Fader Bar— The fader is usedto manually control the rate of a transition. What isbeing transitioned, and the type of transition, arecontrolled from the Transition Area.
17. Keyer Transitions Buttons — These buttons areused to perform cuts or auto transitions on keysdirectly, without having to include them as part ofthe next transition.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Control Panel Overview • 15
CB9 Control PanelThe CB9 control panel is made up of a number of distinctareas that control different aspects of the switcher.
Figure 4: Carbonite Black Solo Panel Top
1. Pattern/Menu Selection Buttons— These buttonsare used to select a pattern for a wipe transition, orto access switcher menus.
2. USB — The USB port on the control panel is notimplemented at this time.
3. Memory Store/Recall Buttons — These buttonsare used to store or recall memories.
4. Main Display and Selection Knobs — The threeselection knobs are used to adjust and select variousmenu items or values. The knobs are rotated tochoose a value, and pressed to make a selection. Themain display shows the menu system of the switcher.
5. Menu Navigation Buttons — These buttons areused to access switcher menus, move back and forthbetween menus.
6. Positioner— The positioner is used to control somewipe, border, and wash parameters, as well as someexternal devices. Along with the 2D positioner is aknob used for additional input.
7. Key Type Buttons — These buttons are used tochoose the type of key you want to use. Use thesebuttons with the key select buttons to select thekeyer, and the type of key you want to use.
8. Keyer Select Buttons— By default these user selectbuttons are used to select which keyer the panel isassigned to. Each button can be assigned to adifferent selection.
9. User Select Buttons — These user select buttonsare used to choose which keyer, aux bus, MiniME™,ME, or custom control bank the panel is assignedto.
10. Video Source Buses— These buses are broken intothe Preset, Program, and Key/Aux/Custom Controlbuses. The Preset bus is the bottom row of sourcebuttons and selects the video source that will be
taken on-air with the next background transition.The Program bus is the middle row of source buttonsand selects the video source that is currently on-airon the background. The Key/Aux/Custom Controlbus is the top row of source buttons and selects thevideo source that is chosen on the selected keyer oraux bus, or the custom control that is chosen on theselected custom control bank.
11. TransitionArea— These buttons are used to selectwhich video source buses will be included in thenext transition and what type of transition will beperformed. The Cut and Auto Trans buttons are usedto perform transitions.
12. On-Air Lights — These lights glow red to showwhich keyers are currently on-air.
13. Keyer Transitions Buttons — These buttons areused to perform auto transitions on keys directly,without having to include them as part of the nexttransition.
14. Manual Transition Fader Bar— The fader is usedto manually control the rate of a transition. What isbeing transitioned, and the type of transition, arecontrolled from the Transition Area.
16 • Control Panel Overview — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Menu SystemThe menu system on the control panel or soft panel isaccessed either by pressing MENU and the MenuSelection button for the menu you want to access, orthrough an auto-follow for selected functions.
Menu NavigationThe menu system allows you to access all of the setupand configuration information for the switcher. In somecases, a menu can be accessed either by pressing theMENU button and navigating to the menu, or bydouble-pressing a button on the control panel.1. Press MENU. The Menu Selection mnemonic
buttons light up with the names of the menu trees.
2. Press the Menu Selection button for the menu youwant to navigate to. The first page of the menu isshown on the display.
3. Press NEXT to navigate to the next page of thecurrent menu. If the NEXT button is not lit, thereare no other pages to the current menu.
Tip: If you want to return to the first page of a menu, press andhold NEXT and press HOME. You can also navigate up onelevel in a menu tree by pressing and holdingNEXT and pressingUP.
Auto-Follow MenusThe switcher navigates to auto-follow menusautomatically when you select certain functions on theswitcher. For example, when you select a key the keyadjustment menu is shown on the display.Auto-Follow functionality also applies to video sourcebuttons that have external devices assigned to them. Ifyou select a source button that an external device isassigned to, the peripheral control menu for that specificdevice is shown.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Menu System • 17
Switcher BasicsBefore using your switcher, it is important to becomefamiliar with how audio and video is handled by theswitcher. Some important concepts includes videosources, video layering and re-entry, and preview.
Audio and Video ProcessingVideo and audio signals are processed and passed throughthe switcher in different ways, depending on how theswitcher is being used or is set up. A better understandingof how the switcher is processing these signals help youto achieve the production you want.
Video Processing and FlowVideo is processed in a number of blocks in the switcher.After video comes into the switcher, the framesynchronizers / format converters are applied (dependingon the frame you have). At this point any required colorcorrection is also applied. After input the video signal isrouted through the crosspoint. The crosspoint can routeany input to any output for straight switching, or to thevideo processor and DVE and back for videomanipulation. Just before the video signal is sent to theoutput, the processing of the ancillary data is performed.
VideoProcessing& DVE
Crosspoint
FSFC ColorCorr
ColorCorr
VideoIn
FSFCVideoOut
Figure 5: Video Flow Through the Switcher
Audio Processing and FlowUnlike video, the switcher does not handle audio signalsindependently. An audio signal is embedded into theancillary data of a video signal before is comes into theswitcher. As the signal comes into the switcher and ismanipulated, you must ensure not to perform an operationthat will force the ancillary data to be stripped.
No
ApplyFSFC?
Yes
No
ANCset toStrip?
Audio is strippedfrom video signal
Audio cannot bere-embedded in
video signal
Audio isre-embedded in
video signal
Switcher
Figure 6: Video Flow Through the Switcher
The following restrictions apply to ancillary data beingincluded in the output:• All ME program buses pass ancillary data.• MultiViewer outputs do not include any ancillary
data.• MiniME™ and Canvas outputs do not include any
ancillary data unless an ME with ancillary data isre-entered onto the background bus.
• ME Preview does not include ancillary data unlessthe background is not selected as part of the nexttransition.
• A MiniME™ or Canvas can include ancillary data ifan ME is re-entered onto the background.
• Any format conversion on the input video signal.• Setting ancillary data to be stripped.When you are performing a transition, or keying, theembedded audio is carried in the ancillary data of thebackground video signal. The ancillary data from thebackground source is replaced with the ancillary datafrom the preset source, and the ancillary data for keyedsources is stripped.
Note: Audio that comes from the Media-Store, for a MediaWipefor example, is only available on the AES outputs on the frame,and is not embedded into the background video signal.
Video SourcesThe switcher has access to two basic types of videosources, external and internal. All video sources can beassigned to video source buttons. By pressing a videosource button on a bus, the video source assigned to thatbutton is selected on that bus.• External — External video sources come from
cameras, video servers, character generators, or otherexternal devices into the switcher.
• Internal — Internal video sources come frominternally generated video, such as Media-Storechannels, matte color, and black.
18 • Switcher Basics — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
To Select a Source on a BusTo select a video source on a bus, you must identify theME, MiniME™, Aux, Canvas, or chroma key and busyou want to assign a video source to, and then press thesource button you want to select on that bus.
The user buttons on the control panel can be assignedto any ME, MiniME™, Aux Bus, Canvas, or chroma keyfor quick access, or any button can be held to allow youto select the ME, MiniME™, Aux, Canvas, or chromakey.
Tip: Source selection can also be made from the Buses tab onthe Live Assist node in DashBoard. Key bus source selectionscan also be made using the Key Source button on the Keyerstab on the Live Assist node in DashBoard.
1. Select the ME, MiniME™, chroma key, Aux, Canvas,or keyer that you want to select a source on.
Tip: The user select buttons can be assigned to select anybus on the switcher. If you change what the button isassigned to you should make sure to change the text onthe button cap.
• ME— press the user button assigned to the ME,or press and hold a user button assigned to anME/MiniME™ and press MEX on the key bus.
• MiniME™ — press the user button assigned tothe MiniME™, or press and hold a user buttonassigned to an ME/MiniME™ and pressMinME1-4 on the key bus.
• Aux— press the user button assigned to the Aux,or press and hold a user button assigned to anAux and press AUX 1-8 on the key bus.
• Chroma Key — press the user button assignedto the chroma key, or press and hold a userbutton assigned to chroma key and pressCK1-2on the key bus.
• Canvas — press the user button assigned to theCanvas, or press and hold a user button assignedto an ME/MiniME™ and press Can1 or Can2on the key bus.
Tip: You can also press AUX X and press the knob for theAux Bus you want to select.
2. Select the bus you want to select a source on.
Note: Ensure that the source selected on the bus you wantto enter onto the ME, MiniME™, chroma key, Canvas, auxor keyer is valid for that destination. If the source is notvalid, you will not be able to select the bus on the ME,MiniME™, Aux, chroma key, or keyer.
• Background Bus — use the BACKGROUNDbus.
• Preset Bus — use the PRESET bus.
• Key Bus — press KEY X SEL to assign theKEY/AUX/CUSTOM CONTROL bus to thatkeyer.
• Aux Bus — use the KEY/AUX/CUSTOMCONTROL bus.
3. Select the source you want to use on the bus. Usethe Shift button to access additional sources.
Tip: Double-press the SHIFT button to lock the button rowto the shifted bus. Press the SHIFT button again to returnto the non-shifted bus. The Shift-Lock is reset when the MEis reset, but not when a factory default or switcher set isrecalled.
Video LayeringHow video is layered in the output of the switcherdepends on how an ME is re-entered onto the other, andwhat keyers are on-air for the ME. If we assume thateach ME has all keyers on-air and that ME 2 is re-enteredinto ME 1 and ME 1 is re-entered into ME P/P, thelayering will start with ME 2 Background and progressto the highest ME and keyer.
ME 2 BackgroundKe
yer1
Keyer2
Keyer3
Keyer4
ME 1 Background
Keyer1
Keyer2
Keyer3
Keyer4
ME P/P Background
Keyer1
Keyer2
Keyer3
Keyer4
Figure 7: Video Layering
Tip: You can select a MiniME™ on an ME or different MiniME™
to re-enter it. Up to two MiniME™ re-entries, including an ME isallowed.
Re-EntryRe-entry is the term used to describe the process ofselecting another ME on an ME. For example, if youselect ME 2 on ME 1, ME 2 is said to be re-entered ontoME 1. Re-entry takes the output of an ME and uses it asthe background or key on the other ME. If you select anME on the background bus, the ME becomes backgroundvideo source of the other ME. If you select an ME on aKey Bus, the ME becomes the key source of the otherME.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working withre-entries:
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Switcher Basics • 19
• You cannot re-enter an ME, or the Clean Feed of anME, into itself.
To Re-Enter an ME1. Set up ME 2 with a background and a key.
ME2 BKGD
ME 2Key 1
Figure 8: ME 2
2. Set up ME P/P with a key.
ME P/P BKGD
ME P/PKey 1
Figure 9: ME P/P
3. Select ME 2 as a source on the Background Bus ofME P/P. Notice that the output of ME 2 is now beingused as the background of ME P/P.
ME2 BKGD
ME 2Key 1
ME P/PKey 1
Figure 10: ME 2 Re-entered onto ME P/P
FlexiClean Clean FeedFlexiClean provides a second program output that isderived from a different location than the standardprogram output. A frequent application is the recordingof shows for later airing without call-in phone numbersinserted.The clean feed output can come from before or betweenthe keyers.
KEY 1 KEY 2PGM/PST KEY 3 KEY 4
Video PreviewVideo preview allows you to use an additional monitorto preview what the next shot is going to be. The preview
for an ME shows what is selected for the next transitionon that ME. This includes the keys and background videosources that will be on-air after the next transition.
MultiViewerEach MultiViewer allows you to view up to 16 videosources, in 45 different layouts, from a single outputBNC. Any video source on the switcher, including MEProgram, Preview, and Media-Store channels, can berouted to any box on the MultiViewer. All boxes on theMultiViewer output include mnemonic source namesand red and green tallies.
ME CopyYou can copy the entire contents of an ME, MiniME™,or Canvas to another ME, MiniME™, or Canvas. Theentire contents of the destination is replaced with thecontents of the source.When you copy an ME, the switcher tries to assignresources to the destination ME to match the source ME.If these resources are not available, the switcher mayneed to steal resources. If you are performing the copyfrom the control panel you will be asked to confirm thestealing of any required resources. From DashBoard youwill not be asked and the required resources will bestolen.
To Copy an ME Using the Control PanelUse the buttons on the rows of the control panel to copythe contents of an ME to another.
Note: You must have at least a 2 ME control panel to performan ME copy from the control panel. If you only have a 1 MEcontrol panel, you must perform the copy from DashBoard.
1. Press and hold the BKGD button on the transitionarea of the ME that you want to copy to.This is the destination ME that you want to copy to.
2. Press theBKGD button on the transition area of theME you want to copy.This is the source ME that you want to copy from.
To Copy an ME Using DashBoardUse DashBoard to copy the contents of an ME to another.1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > ME
Copy.2. Click aDestination button to select the destination
that you want to copy to.3. Click aSource button to select the source you want
to copy.4. Click Copy.
20 • Switcher Basics — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DashBoardThe DashBoard control system allows remote access tomultiple pieces of Ross Video equipment, includingopenGear® cards, Carbonite production switchers,BlackStorm video servers, and ACID UltraChromeHRcameras.Download and install the latest version of DashBoardfrom http://www.opengear.tv/. Review the documentationthat comes with DashBoard for information on installingand launching DashBoard.
Note: Carbonite Ultra requires DashBoard v8.5, or higher.
Tip: For detailed instructions on using DashBoard withCarbonite, navigate to the online help athelp.rossvideo.com/carbonite.
Tip: You can also connect to the switcher from an Ultritouchusing DashBoard. Refer to Ultritouch on page 24 for moreinformation.
Switcher Status in DashBoardThe DashBoard control system allows you to connect tothe switcher and view status information for variouscomponents of the frame.
ConfigurationThe Configuration node provides a graphical interfaceto switcher settings such as Reference, Inputs, Outputs,and MultiViewer. You can switch between the differentconfigurations by selecting the tabs at the bottom of theDashBoard window.
Live AssistThe Live Assist node provides a graphical interface tofunctions such as keying, transition, and memory settingsof the switcher. You can switch between the differentsettings by selecting the tabs at the bottom of theDashBoard window.
PaneLINKLive Assist can be set to either mirror actions on theswitcher control panel, or only show actions on thecurrently selected ME and Keyer on the current tab. Forexample, with PaneLINK turned on, pressing KEY 1SEL, WIPE, and then SELF KEY causes Live Assistto show the Keyers tab, the Trans tab, and then theKeyers tab again. With PaneLINK turned off, LiveAssist does not switch between tabs.The PaneLINK button is located at the bottom rightcorner of the Live Assist window.
Custom ControlsThe Custom Control node provides a graphics interfacefor recording, editing, and running custom controls.
ViewControlThe ViewControl interface through DashBoard allowsyou to coordinate the control over the Carbonite switcher,XPression Live Graphics System, and the BlackStormPlayout Server all through a touchscreen interface.Through ViewControl you can select sources, performtransitions, and run custom controls.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — DashBoard • 21
MediaManagerThe MediaManager node allows you to connect to theMediaManager web interface from within DashBoard.
Tip: You can either launch the MediaManager directly using theswitcher IP address, or you can access it using theMediaManager node in DashBoard. If you are logging intoMediaManager from DashBoard, you must have Microsoft®Internet Explorer® 10, or higher, installed.
HelpThe help node in DashBoard launches the integrated helpsystem with full search capability.
PanelThe Panel node provides you with a graphical interfaceto the menu system and control surfaces of the switcher.This allows you to setup and control the switcher withouta control panel.The screen can be broken up into several differentfunctional areas. Each of these areas allows you tointeract with different aspects of the switcher interface.
Menu Area Control Area
User Area
Bus Area
Menu AreaThe menu area provides a graphic representation of themenu system on a Carbonite switcher. The Select, Up,and Down buttons represent the actions of turning andpressing the knobs on the panel. The buttons in the topright corner allow you to navigate around in the menutree, and the stylized mnemonic buttons at the bottomallow you to access different menus.
User AreaThe user area allows you to select what the bus area isassigned to, or interact with a virtual positioner. PresstheME/Key,Aux Bus, orPositioner button to a selecthow the user area appears.The ME/Key button allows you to select what the busarea is assigned to. Click ME X, MiniME X, CanvasX, or CK (chroma key) to assign the bus area to thatoutput. Click one of theKey X Sel buttons to assign thekey bus in the bus area to that key.
TheAux Bus button allows you to select one of the auxbuses that the key bus row in the bus area is assigned to.
Note: The selection of one of the aux bus or key select buttonsindicated what the key bus in the bus area is assigned to. Youmay have to switch between the ME/Key and Aux Bus buttonsto see where the bus is assigned.
22 • DashBoard — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
The Positioner button provides a virtual interface tothe positioner. The positioner is used in device bus, orto move keys or masks around. Click and hold thepositioner and move it around to emulate moving thepositioner around. The slider to the right of the positioneremulated twisting the positioner knob on the panel. Thebutton to the left of the positioner emulates the buttonon the top of the positioner knob on the panel.
Control AreaThe control area contains the main DashBoard interfaceto the switcher. Click Menu and select the menu youwant to navigate to. When the Live Assist menu isselected, the sub-menus will follow actions in the busarea when PaneLINK is on.
Bus AreaThe bus area provides a graphic representation of thepanel row on the switcher. Use the user area buttons toassign the bus area to an ME, key, and aux bus. Sourcesare then selected on the key, program, and preset buses,and transitions are set up and performed with thetransition buttons to the right of the source selectionbuttons.
Tip: Use the Hold On or 2Press buttons to emulate a pressand hold of a button. This allows you to press and hold onebutton and then press another.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — DashBoard • 23
UltritouchThe 2RU rack mountable Ultritouch adaptable systemcontrol panel allows you to control some aspects ofswitcher operation using a DashBoard interface.The DashBoard interface on Ultritouch provides status,buses, and custom control tabs. You must connect to theswitcher from Ultritouch to be able to control the switcherfunctions. Refer to the Ultritouch documentation forinformation on navigating the Ultritouch menu andmanually connecting to a device.Once you are connected to the switcher, tap theConnected Devices button and select the switcheryou want to control from the list and tap Carbonite.The available tabs for the switcher are listed. Tap one ofthe available tabs to open it.
Navigation MenuTap Navigation Menu and tap the tab you want tonavigate to.
StatusThis tab allows you to view status information for variousswitcher components. These tabs are the same as theSwitcher Status tab from a DashBoard computer.
BusesThis tab allows you to select sources on any bus on theswitcher. This tab is this same as the Bus Assignmentspage from a DashBoard computer.1. Tap the area and bus that you want to select a source
on.2. Tap the source that you want to select or tap Exit to
close the popup.
Tip: The currently selected bus is shown at the upper leftof the popup.
Custom ControlThis tab allows you to run custom controls on theswitcher. This tab is this same as the Custom ControlShotBox tab from a DashBoard computer. You cannotedit a custom control from this tab.1. Tap the bank for the custom control you want to run.2. Tap the custom control on the selected bank that you
want to run.
24 • Ultritouch — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
ViewControl (HD Only)The ViewControl interface through DashBoard allowsyou to coordinate the control over the Carbonite switcher,XPression Live Graphics System, and the BlackStormPlayout Server all through a touchscreen interface.Through ViewControl you can select sources, performtransitions, and run custom controls.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working withViewControl• Only the Video Processor MultiViewer can be used
for ViewControl.• ViewControl is not supported in UHDTV1.• ViewControl requires DashBoard 5.1, or later.• Only the sources assigned to the MultiViewer boxes
are available for direct selection. Custom controlscan be used to select other sources.
• A running custom control, or a custom control thatis paused or held, are not shown on the ViewControlinterface.
• The control panel does not follow key and busselections made on ViewControl.
ViewControl OverviewThe ViewControl interface provides quick access to anumber of custom control buttons as well as the transitionfunctionality of the switcher.
Custom Control ButtonsThe custom control buttons can be assigned to anycustom control on the switcher and given unique namesand icons. The button groups on the left (shown below)are organized into groups, or tabs.
Bus Selection ButtonsThe bus selection buttons allow you to select thedifferent buses on different ME outputs of the switcher.
To select a source on a bus, press the bus selection button,and press the MultiViewer box for the source you wantto select. For example, to select camera 1 on ME 2 Key3, press M2 K3 and then press the box for the camera 1source.
Keyer Transition ButtonsThe Keyer Transition buttons allow you to perform a cutor dissolve of the keys on the Program bus, withouthaving to include them as part of the next transition.These buttons act the same as the Keyer TransitionButtons on the control panel.
Tip: The Cut buttons turn red when a key is on-air.
Transition ButtonsThe transition buttons allow you to select what isincluded in the next transition, what type of transition isto be performed, and perform the transition. Thesebuttons function similarly to the buttons in the TransitionArea on the control panel.
Tip: The Transition Buttons on ViewControl only control thetransition area of ME P/P. To control another ME you can createa custom control to perform the effect you want and assign it toone of the custom control buttons.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — ViewControl (HD Only) • 25
Custom Control Button SetupWhen you assign a custom control to a button, you cangive that button a unique name and assign an icon to it.The images for the icons must be on a USB drive in theframe when you assign them. Once assigned the iconsare stored in the frame and the USB can be removed.Each of the tabs can be named.The configuration of the tabs and custom controlassignment to buttons are stored with the switcherpersonality settings.
To Set up the Custom Control ButtonsYou must assign custom controls from the switcher tothe buttons on ViewControl.
If you want to assign icons to the custom control buttons,you must have the images you want to use for the iconsstored on a USB drive installed in the frame. After theimages have been assigned you can remove the USBdrive.
1. Click the button in the upper right corner of thewindow.
2. Press the custom control button that you want to setup.
3. Enter a name for the button in the Button Namefield.
Tip: You can change the name of a tab by selecting abutton on the tab and then entering a new name in theGroup Name field.
4. Click the Bank button and select the number of thebank you want to select a custom control from.
5. Click the CC X button and select the number of thecustom control you want to assign to the button.
6. Navigate the files on the USB drive and click theimage you want to assign as the icon for the button.
Tip: Press Default Icon to switch back to the default icon.
7. Set up additional custom control buttons as required.8. Press Done when you are done setting up custom
control buttons.
Connecting ViewControlViewControl combines an overlay image fromDashBoard with a custom MultiViewer output from theswitcher to generate the interface. This requires someexternal SDI/HDMI video conversion equipment, as wellas a touchscreen display.
Note: An input FSFC should be applied to the input you areusing for ViewControl.
Figure 11: ViewControl Setup
The following connections are required for ViewControl:• ViewControl is only supported in 1080i or 720p. The
switcher must be operating in one of these formatsfor ViewControl to operate.
• Set the output resolution of the DashBoard computerto either 1920×1080 or 1280×720.
• Use an HDMI to SDI converter to take the output ofthe DashBoard computer and put it into a resolutionthat the switcher can use. Ensure that the resolutionis not changed.
• Apply a FSFC to the input that is coming from theDashBoard computer.
• Set up a MultiViewer to use a ViewControl layout.• Use an SDI to HDMI converter to take the output of
the switcher and put it into a resolution that thetouchscreen monitor can use. Ensure that theresolution is not changed.
• Connect the USB cable for the touchscreen to theDashBoard computer.
26 • ViewControl (HD Only) — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
To Set Up the MultiViewer for ViewControlViewControl integrates the MultiViewer output of theswitcher with a graphical overlay from DashBoard toprovide live video in the ViewControl windows. TheMultiViewer must be configured to properly align thevideo for the buttons on ViewControl.
Note: The switcher must be operating in a 1080i or 720p videoformat for ViewControl to operate.
Note: Only the Video Processor MultiViewer can be used forViewControl.
1. Press MENU > System > MultiView.2. Use the MView knob to select MV VP1.3. Use the Layout knob to select a ViewControl
layout.• VCtrlT— (ViewControl Top) places the boxes
at the top of the screen.• VCtrlB — (ViewControl Bottom) places the
boxes at the bottom of the screen.
Tip: If you want to create a custom ViewControl layout,you can use one of the other MultiViewer layouts to createthe look you want, and use PanelBuilder in DashBoard toassign functionality to the layout. Sources can be hiddenfrom a layout by assigning black to the box. For moreinformation on PanelBuilder, refer to the DashBoarddocumentation.
4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Ovrlay knob to turn the overlay On.6. Use theSrc/C knob to select the overlay input from
DashBoard. This is keyed over the MultiViewerlayout.
7. Press the Src/C knob and use the S/Clip knob toadjust the clipping of the overlay source.At 0% the overlay source is completely opaque, andat 100% it is completely transparent.
8. Press NEXT > NEXT.9. Use the Box knob to select the box on the
MultiViewer grid that you want to configure.10. Use the In/Out knob to select a source for the box.
Note: The large box on the left should always be assignedto PV and the large box on the right assigned to PGM.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — ViewControl (HD Only) • 27
TransitionsTransitions are used to change the background video andtake keys on and off-air. A transition can include anycombinations of background and keyers for an ME. Thebackground and each keyer can be transitionedindependently and at the same time using the dedicatedKEY CUT and KEY AUTO buttons.
Performing TransitionsWhat you can include in the transition, and the type oftransition you can perform, depend on the number ofmedia resources you have, and if you are performing abackground and keyer transition at the same time.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when performing transitions:• If any of the sources going on-air have an assigned
GPI output, the GPI output is triggered and theswitcher then waits the configured pre-delay intervalbefore performing the transition. If you perform atransition with the fader handle, the GPI output istriggered but the pre-delay interval is ignored.
• If any of the sources going on-air are assigned to avideo server, you can have the video server play whenthe source is taken on-air by using the RlClip knobto select On.
• If any of the sources going on-air are assigned to avideo server, the switcher waits for the configuredpre-delay interval before performing the transition.If you perform a transition with the fader handle, thepre-delay interval is ignored.
• If the fader is moved during an auto transition, controlof the transition is passed to the fader. You mustcomplete the transition with the fader. This allowsyou to override any auto transition in progress withthe fader.
• A key only transition can be performed by pressingtheKEYCUT orKEYAUTO button for the key youwant to transition.
• You can pause an auto transition by pressing theAuto Trans button during the transition. Press thebutton again to continue the transition.
Understanding the Transition MenuWhen you select a transition type button, the menusystem displays a number of options that allow you toadjust how a transition is performed or appears. Theoptions that are available depend on the type of transitionthat is selected.
Table 1: Transition Menu Items
DescriptionMenu Item
selects the amount of time (Transition Rate), inframes, that an auto transition takes
Time
selects whether GPI outputs assigned to inputsources are triggered before a transition
RlClip
selects whether the dissolve is a standard dissolveor a WhiteFlash transition.
DisTyp
selects the direction that the wipe is performed(forward or reverse), as well as turns the Flip-Flopfeature on or off
Dirctn
selects the amount of time, in frames, that an autotransition dissolve for the keyer takes
Key X
selects the pattern for the wipe transitionPattrn
selects the horizontal position for the wipe patternX Pos
selects the vertical position for the wipe patternY Pos
selects the aspect ratio for the wipe patternAspect
turns the border feature on and selects the size ofthe border on the wipe pattern
Border
selects the amount of softness that is applied tothe wipe border
Soft
selects the color for the wipe border from a pre-setlist
Load
adjusts the hue of the wipe border colorBHue
adjusts the saturation of the wipe border colorBSat
adjusts the luminance of the wipe border colorBLum
selects the rotation for the wipe patternRot
multiplies the wipe pattern horizontally (1-32)HMult
multiplies the wipe pattern vertically (1-32)VMult
selects an animation for a media transitionBrowse
used with the Value knob to adjust parameters forthe MediaWipe (Media-Store Attributes on page54)
Attrib
selects how the Attrib adjustments are savedFunc
turns the Transition Limit feature on or offLimit
selects the pattern for the DVE transitionEffect
To Perform a TransitionAll transitions, with the exception of cuts on thebackground or key bus, have the same basic setup. Toperform a transition, you must select what sources youwant to transition on what buses, and how you want thetransition to appear.1. Select the ME, MiniME™, or Canvas that you want
to perform a transition on.
28 • Transitions — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
2. Select the video sources you want to take on-air oneach bus.For a background transition you must select thesource you want to transition to on the preset bus.
3. In the Transition Area, select the elements (BKGD,KEY 1, KEY 2, KEY 3, KEY 4) you want toinclude in the next transition. To select multiple keysand background, press and hold the first element,and select the additional elements.
4. Use the Time knob to set the length of thebackground transition.
5. Select the type of transition (DISS (Dissolve orWhiteFlash), WIPE, DVE, MEDIA) you want toperform.
Note: The USER button is not implemented at this time.
6. Use theRlClip knob to select whether you want anyvideo server clips assigned to a source being takenon-air to play with the transition (On), or not (Off).
7. Perform the transition.
Tip: You can preview the transition on the preview outputby pressing and holding the transition type button andperform the Auto Trans or Fader transition. You cannotpreview the independent key-only transitions or a MiniME™
transition.
• Auto Transition — press AUTO TRANS. Thetransition is performed at the set transition rate
• Cut — press CUT• Fader — move the fader from one limit to the
other. The rate at which you push the faderdetermines the rate of the transition.
If a pre-delay has been set, the switcher will applythe pre-delay interval before performing thetransition.
To Override the Pre-Delay SettingDuring the pre-delay time, you can override the pre-delaycount and cut the sources on-air immediately.• While the switcher is waiting for the pre-delay
countdown to complete, perform one of the following• Press the source button on the background bus
that is going-on air. The pre-delay countdown andthe transition are aborted and the source is cut toair on the background bus.
• Initiate a transition with the fader handle. Thepre-delay countdown is aborted and the transitionproceeds as you move the fader handle.
To Abort a Transition During the Pre-DelayDuring the pre-delay time, you can abort the transitioncompletely.• While the switcher is waiting for the pre-delay
countdown to complete, perform one of the following• Press any source button on any bus other than the
source button on the background bus that isgoing-on air.
• Press the BKGD or Key X button in the nexttransition area.
• Press the CUT or AUTO TRANS button.• If a key is included in the transition, press one of
the dedicated key transition button.• Recall a memory. The pre-delay countdown and
transition are aborted and the memory register isrecalled.
Cut TransitionsA Cut is an instantaneous transition between videosources. Unlike all the other transition types, there areno intermediate steps between the video source that ison-air, and the video source you are transitioning to.
Cut
Figure 12: Example Cut Transition
A cut is performed either by selecting different sourceson a background or key bus, or by pressing aCut button.
Dissolve TransitionsA Dissolve is a gradual fade between video sources. Fora Background transition, the video signal on theBackground bus and the video signal on the Preset busare mixed together until the Preset bus video signalcompletely replaces the Background bus video signal.
Figure 13: Example Dissolve Transition
To Set Up a DissolveA dissolve transition requires that you set a backgroundand key transition rate for the auto transition. A fadertransition does not use the transition rate.1. Press DISS.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Transitions • 29
2. Use the Time knob to set the length of thebackground transition.
Tip: You can also select a time by pressing one of the 5through 60 buttons.
Tip: Press ME RATE in the Effects Memory area for theME you want to change the rate for, use the keypad to enterthe new rate, and press Enter. (Does not apply to CB1 orCB2.)
3. Use the DisTyp knob to select Diss.4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Key X knobs to select the length of the key
transitions.
Tip: Press KEY RATE in the Effects Memory arearepeatedly to select the Keyer you want to set the rate for,use the keypad to enter the new rate, and press Enter.(Does not apply to CB1 or CB2.)
WhiteFlashPerform a two-step transition where a dissolve to andfrom white, or other selected color, is performed in themiddle of the transition. The video signal on theBackground bus is transitioned to a color background ofthe selected WhiteFlash color. The color background isthen transitioned to the preset bus. WhiteFlash consumesa pattern generator for the transition.Each ME has a separate WhiteFlash generator.
To Set Up a WhiteFlashA WhiteFlash transition is performed just like a normaldissolve except that you must set the color for the flashand the rates for the onset, hold, and fade. transition isperformed just like a normal dissolve except that youmust set the color for the flash and the rates for the onset,hold, and fade.1. Press DISS.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
2. Use the Time knob to set the length of thebackground transition.
Tip: Press ME RATE in the Effects Memory area for theME you want to change the rate for, use the keypad to enterthe new rate, and press Enter. (Does not apply to CB1 orCB2.)
3. Use the DisTyp knob to select Flash.4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Key X knobs to select the length of the key
transitions.
Tip: Press KEY RATE in the Effects Memory arearepeatedly to select the Keyer you want to set the rate for,use the keypad to enter the new rate, and press Enter.(Does not apply to CB1 or CB2.)
6. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.7. Use the Onset, and Offset knobs to select the
percentage of the transition that each phase of theWhiteFlash takes.• Onset — duration of the dissolve to the
WhiteFlash color.• Offset — duration of the dissolve to the preset
video source.• Hold — duration of the dissolve that the
WhiteFlash color is held. This value is theresidual of entire duration minus the onset andoffset.
8. Press NEXT.9. Select a default or custom color for the WhiteFlash.
• Default — use the Load knob to select a presetcolor for the WhiteFlash.
• Custom — press NEXT and use the Hue, Sat,and Lum knobs to select your own color.
Wipe TransitionsA Wipe is a gradual transition where one video signal isreplaced with another according to a wipe pattern. In theexample below, a line wipe is being used.
Figure 14: Example Wipe Transition
For Key transitions, the key is wiped on or off-air withthe transition and the background remains untouched.The duration of a wipe transition depends on either thetransition rate for the ME, or the rate at which the faderis moved.
To Set Up a WipeA wipe transition requires that you select a wipe pattern,set the direction and number/size of wipe pattern, as wellas set a background and key transition rate for the autotransition. A fader transition does not use the transitionrate.1. Press WIPE.2. Use the Time knob to set the length of the
background transition.
Tip: Press ME RATE in the Effects Memory area for theME you want to change the rate for, use the keypad to enterthe new rate, and press Enter. (Does not apply to CB1 orCB2.)
30 • Transitions — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Tip: Press KEY RATE in the Effects Memory arearepeatedly to select the Keyer you want to set the rate for,use the keypad to enter the new rate, and press Enter.(Does not apply to CB1 or CB2.)
3. Use the Dirctn knob to select the direction that thewipe travels.
4. Press the Dirctn knob to select whether the wiperuns forward during the first transition and thenreverse during the second (FF), or if it always goesin the same direction.
5. Press NEXT.6. Use the Pattrn knob to select the wipe pattern you
want to use. You can also select the pattern bypressing the pattern button directly.
7. Use the X Pos and Y Pos knobs to position thewipe pattern. You can also use the positioner.
8. Press NEXT.9. Use the Aspect knob to adjust the aspect ratio of
the wipe pattern.Not all patterns can be adjusted.
10. Use the Border and Soft knobs to apply a borderto the wipe pattern.Refer to the section To Apply a Border to a Patternon page 31 for information on borders.
11. Press NEXT. If a border is applied to the wipe, youmust press NEXT multiple times to get to the nextstep.
12. Use the Rot knob to rotate the pattern.Not all patterns can be rotated.
13. Use the HMult knob to multiply the patternhorizontally.
14. Use the VMult knob to multiply the patternvertically.
To Apply a Border to a PatternA border is applied around the outside edge of the pattern,but does not extend beyond the edge of the key.1. Press WIPE > NEXT > NEXT.2. Use theBorder knob to adjust the size of the border
around the pattern.3. Use the Soft knob to adjust the softness of the
pattern border.4. Press NEXT.5. Select a default or custom color for the border
(borders only).• Default — use the Load knob to select a preset
color for the border.
• Custom — press NEXT and use the BHue,BSat, and BLum knobs to select your owncolor.
DVE TransitionsA DVE transition is a gradual transition where one videosignal is replaced with another according to a 2D DVEpattern.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when performing DVEtransitions:• You must include the background when performing
a DVE transition on a Chroma Key, Self Key, orAuto-Select Key. If you do not include thebackground, a dissolve transition is performed.
• Performing a DVE transition on a DVE Key withoutincluding the background scales the transition effectto the size of the DVE Key. This transition does notconsume an additional DVE resource.
• Performing a DVE transition on a DVE Key with thebackground included does not scale the transitioneffect. This transition consumes the second DVEresource.
• You cannot perform a DVE transition on a Canvas.• You can only perform a DVE transition on a DVE
key on a MiniME™. If the transition includes theBackground, or a keyer that is not set as a DVE, thetransition is switched to a dissolve.
To Set Up a DVE TransitionA DVE transition requires that you select the DVEpattern and duration for the transition.1. Press DVE.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™. DVEtransitions on a MiniME™ can only be performed on DVEkeys.
2. Use the Time knob to set the length of thebackground transition.
Tip: Press ME RATE in the Effects Memory area for theME you want to change the rate for, use the keypad to enterthe new rate, and press Enter. (Does not apply to CB1 orCB2.)
Tip: Press KEY RATE in the Effects Memory arearepeatedly to select the Keyer you want to set the rate for,use the keypad to enter the new rate, and press Enter.(Does not apply to CB1 or CB2.)
3. Use the Dirctn knob to select the direction that thewipe travels.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Transitions • 31
4. Press the Dirctn knob to select whether the wiperuns forward during the first transition and thenreverse during the second (FF), or if it always goesin the same direction.
5. Press NEXT.6. Use the Effect knob to select the DVE pattern you
want to use. You can also select most of the patternsby pressing the mnemonic pattern button directly.• PushL — Push Left• PushR — Push Right• PushU — Push Up• PushD — Push Down• SqzHor — Squeeze Horizontally• SqzVert — Squeeze Vertically• SqzCtr — Squeeze to the Center• PushUL — Push to Upper-Left• PushUR — Push to Upper-Right• PushDL — Push to Lower-Left• PushDR — Push to Lower-Right• SqzUR — Squeeze to Upper-Right• SqzUL — Squeeze to Upper-Left• SqzDR — Squeeze to Lower-Right• SqzDL — Squeeze to Lower-Right• CirclL — Circle Left• CirclR — Circle Right• FlyTru — Fly Through• Strtch — Stretch Horizontally to Black• Tumble — Tumble Down• 1000lb — Falls and then Bounces• SqzU — Squeeze Up• SqzD — Squeeze Down• SqzL — Squeeze Left• SqzR — Squeeze Right
MediaWipe TransitionsA MediaWipe allows you to use an animation to covera transition. When the transition starts, the switcher playsthe selected animation over top of the background andkeys that are being transitioned. A MediaWipe can beused to cover a cut, dissolve, wipe, or DVE transition.For a cut MediaWipe, the transition is performed whenthe cut point is reached. It is important to use a full-screenimage in the animation at the cut point so that the cut isnot visible on-air.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when performingMediaWipe:
• Although you can select a still image for a mediatransition, it is not recommended.
• Only Auto Transition should be used for Mediatransitions. Using the fader to perform the transitionmanually could result in jumps in the animation.
• The duration of the transition (Time) is set by thelength of the animation and the play speed of theanimation.
• The audio associated with a MediaWipe is onlyavailable on the AES outputs.
• You cannot perform a MediaWipe transition on aMiniME™ or Canvas.
• Only Media-Store channels 1 and 2 can be used fora MediaWipe.
To Set Up a MediaWipeA MediaWipe requires that you select the animation youwant to use and then set up how you want to transitionperformed under the animation. This information is storedwith the media item when you press save.1. Press MEDIA.
Tip: Press and hold the MEDIA button and selectMedia-Store channel 1 or 2 on the Preset bus to assign theanimation to that channel. The Media-Store channels mustbe assigned to source buttons with the bus map to beselectable.
2. Press theBrowse knob and use the knob to navigateto the file you want to load. Press the knob to makea selection.
3. Press NEXT.4. Use the Attrib and Value knobs to set wipe
parameters.• X-Pos — position the wipe horizontally.• Y-Pos — position the wipe vertically.• Shaped — whether the MediaWipe alpha is
shaped (yes) or unshaped (no).• Media# — the media id for the media item you
want to use for the MediaWipe.
5. Press Save Func to save the changes.6. Press NEXT.7. Press EditMT.8. In the pattern selection area, select the type of
transition you want to use under the MediaWipe.• Cut (0) — Use the Cut knob to select the cut
point for the transition.• Dissolve (1) — Use the Start knob to select
the point where the dissolve starts and the Rateknob to select the duration of the transition.
32 • Transitions — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
• Wipe (2) — Use the Start knob to select thepoint where the dissolve starts and theRate knobto select the duration of the transition. PressNEXT and set up the remaining wipe parametersas normal. Wipe border is not supported.
• DVE (3) — Use the Start knob to select thepoint where the dissolve starts and theRate knobto select the duration of the transition. PressNEXT and set up the remaining DVE wipeparameters as normal.
Tip: If you select a negative start point for the transition,the transition will start first and then the animation will playafter the start point duration has passed.
Tip: You can use the fader to move through the MediaWipeanimation to the point where you want the transition to startand press Start Trans (5) and then move the fader to thepoint where you want the transition to end and press EndTrans (6).
9. Use the fader to select a point in the animation thatyou want to use as a thumbnail for the MediaWipeand press Thumb Frame (8).
10. Press Save (9) to save the new setting to theselected media item.
To Set the MediaWipe LayerThe MediaWipe can be set to occur between any of thekeys or the background. When you set the layer to aspecific key, the MediaWipe animation will cover thatkey, even if the key is not part of the transition. Theanimation plays over the key, but the key remains afterthe animation is finished. Any keys above the MediaWipelayer remain on top of the animation.1. Press MEDIA > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.
Note: The Layer knob may be in a different location,depending on the type of MediaWipe transition is selected.
2. Use the Layer knob to select where the MediaWipewill occur.• Auto— MediaWipe occurs over highest number
key in the transition.• Bkgd — MediaWipe occurs over the
background, but under all keys.• Key1— MediaWipe occurs over the background
and key 1, but under remaining keys.• Key2— MediaWipe occurs over the background
and key 2, but under remaining keys.• Key3— MediaWipe occurs over the background
and key 3, but under key 4.• Key4— MediaWipe occurs over the background
and all keys.
Important: If a key is above the MediaWipelayer and included in the MediaWipe transition,it will cut off-air with the transition. This isnormally covered by the animation when thelayer is above the key.
Transition LimitsThe Transition Limit allows you to set the point in atransition where an auto transition stops. When active,the point in the transition where the auto transition willstop is indicated by a flashing segment on the transitionprogress bar next to the fader handle. The auto transitionproceeds to this point and stops. The second autotransition starts from the transition limit point and goesback to where the first transition started.
Tip: If you turn Limit off when the transition has stopped at thetransition limit point, the next transition starts from the transitionlimit point and goes forward to complete the transition, insteadof going back to the start.
To Set Up a Transition LimitA transition limit is set using the fader or the slider to setup the transition limit on. The transition limit is specificto the ME it is set on.1. Set up the transition you want to perform.2. Press NEXT until Limit is shown on the menu.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
3. Move the fader to the position in the transition whereyou want to set the transition limit point.
4. Toggle the Limit knob (On) to set the transitionlimit point.The segment on the transition progress bar next tothe fader handle flashes, indicating the location ofthe transition limit point.
The transition limit is set and active for the ME you setit on. You can turn transition limit on and off by togglingthe Limit knob while the fader is at either the top orbottom limit. If the fader is not on a limit when youtoggle the transition limit on, a new transition limit willbe set. Double-press theLimit knob to reset the transitionlimit point.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Transitions • 33
Patterns, Washes, andMattes
Patterns, Washes, and Mattes are internally generatedgraphical elements that can be used for key orbackground fill, key shapes, and transition effects. Theswitcher has a limited number of pattern and mattegenerators dedicated to each ME.
PatternsPattern generators are used for wipes, masks, and washes.Each pattern generator can create a single pattern outputthat can be adjusted to create a specific look.Patterns can be applied to the following:• Wipes — Press WIPE.• Masks — Select the key you want apply the mask to
and use the Mask knob to select Pattern.• Washes — Select the matte generator (BG) on a
background or key bus and use the Wash knob toselect On.
Note: Pattern masks are not supported in UHDTV1.
To Set Up a PatternWhen a pattern generator is assigned to a wipe, mask, orwash, the pattern setting are displayed. Selecting theWIPE button, KEY SEL button, or the matte generator(BG) returns to this menu. When a pattern generator isassigned the pattern settings are part of the setup menu.1. Use the Pattrn knob to select the wipe pattern you
want to use. You can also select the pattern bypressing the pattern button directly.
2. Use the X Pos knob to position the wipe patternhorizontally. You can also use the positioner.
3. Use the Y Pos knob to position the wipe patternvertically. You can also use the positioner.
4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Aspect knob to adjust the aspect ratio of
the patten. Not all patterns can be adjusted.6. Use the Border knob to apply a border to the wipe.
Tip: Use the Soft and NEXT > Load knobs to configurethe border.
7. Press NEXT. If a border is applied to the wipe ormask, you must press NEXT multiple times to getto the next step.
8. Use the Rot knob to adjust the aspect ratio of thepatten. Not all patterns can be rotated.
9. Use the HMult knob to multiply the patternhorizontally.
10. Use the VMult knob to multiply the patternvertically.
WashesWashes are applied to matte generators selected on thebackground or key buses and allow you to apply atwo-color effect based on a selected pattern.
To Set Up a WashA wash applies colors to a pattern selected for a matte.The first color is preset to the matte color, but both areselectable. Selecting the source button again, or KEYSEL button returns to this menu. Refer to the sectionson mattes and patterns for information on setting themup. You can load a preset color instead of creating thefirst custom color.1. Use the Hue 1 knob to adjust the hue of the first
custom color.2. Use the Sat 1 knob to adjust the saturation of the
first custom color.3. Use the Lum 1 knob to adjust the luminance of the
first custom color.4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Wash knob to select On.6. Press NEXT.7. Use the Size knob to select the size of the wash
pattern.8. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.9. Use the Hue 2 knob to adjust the hue of the second
custom color.10. Use the Sat 2 knob to adjust the saturation of the
second custom color.11. Use the Lum 2 knob to adjust the luminance of the
second custom color.
MattesMattes are solid color signals that can be applied tobackgrounds and keys, and borders. Color selection isdone either by picking a preset color, or by adjusted hue,saturation, and luminance to create a custom color.Mattes can be applied to the following:• Background — Select the matte generator (BG) on
a background or key bus. The full region of thebackground or key is filled with the selected color.
• Border — Assign a border to a WIPE transition ora key. The wipe border is filled with the selectedcolor.
34 • Patterns, Washes, and Mattes — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
To Set Up a Matte ColorWhen a matte generator is assigned to a background orkey, the matte setting are displayed. Selecting the sourcebutton again, or KEY SEL button returns to this menu.When a matte generator is assigned to a key border orwipe border, the matte settings is part of the setup menu,and become active when Border is set to greater than0.1. Press NEXT.2. Use the Load knob to select the preset color you
want to use.3. Press the Load knob to load the selected color.
If you want to use the preset color, ignore the restof this procedure.
4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Hue knob to adjust the hue of your custom
color.6. Use the Sat knob to adjust the saturation of your
custom color.7. Use the Lum knob to adjust the luminance of your
custom color.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Patterns, Washes, and Mattes • 35
KeyingKeying is the term used to describe when you insert (orelectronically cut) portions of one scene into another, orplace titles over background images. Keys are made upof two basic components, an alpha, that cuts the hole inthe background video, and a fill, that fills the hole withdifferent video.Keys, like MEs, are layered onto the background videosignal from the lowest numbered key to the highest onan ME.
Note: DashBoard Live Assist will not notify you of errormessages or if a confirmation is required. For example, if thereare no available resources for the DVE Key, or Chroma Key,you are trying to create, the switcher will not create the key andno notification will be shown.
Background
Key1
Key2
Key3
Key4
Figure 15: Key Priority
Understanding the Keying MenuWhen you select a key type button SELF KEY, AUTOSELECT, CHR KEY, or DVE), the menu systemdisplays a number of options that allow you to adjusthow a the key appears. The options that are availabledepend on the type of key that is selected.The switcher supports Self, Auto Select, Chroma, andDVE keys in each ME.
Table 2: Keying Menu Items
DescriptionMenu Item
removes lower-saturated colors from the videoimage
Clip
adjusts the transition between video image, andthe parts of the video image that are removed
Gain
adjusts the overall transparency of the key videoTransp
sets the clip, gain, and transparency values for selfkeys back to the default
Linear
reverses the polarity of the key alpha so that theholes in the background are cut by dark areas ofthe key alpha instead of bright areas
Invert
overrides the shaped setting for the keyMode
selects the type of mask that is applied to the key(Masks on page 42)
Mask
DescriptionMenu Item
turns the force mask feature on or off (To PatternMask a Key (SD/HD Only) on page 42)
M-Frce
turns the invert mask feature on or off (To PatternMask a Key (SD/HD Only) on page 42)
M-Inv
adjusts the size of the mask or DVE keySize
selects the pattern for the pattern maskPattrn
selects the horizontal position of the mask or DVEkey
X Pos
selects the vertical position of the mask or DVEkey
Y Pos
selects the aspect ratio for the mask pattern orDVE key
Aspect
turns the border feature on and selects the size ofthe border on the mask pattern or DVE key
Border
selects the amount of softness that is applied tothe mask or DVE key border
Soft
selects the color for the border from a pre-set listLoad
adjusts the hue of the border colorBHue
adjusts the saturation of the border colorBSat
adjusts the luminance of the border colorBLum
selects the rotation for the mask patternRot
multiplies the mask pattern horizontally (1-32)HMult
multiplies the mask pattern vertically (1-32)VMult
press to toggle between HCrop, Left/R, andL/Rght• HCrop— adjusts the horizontal cropping of
the DVE key• Left/R— adjusts the cropping of the left side
of the DVE key• L/Rght—adjusts the cropping of the right side
of the DVE key
HCrop
adjusts the vertical cropping of the DVE key• Top/B—adjusts the cropping of the top of the
DVE key• T/Bttm— adjusts the cropping of the bottom
of the DVE key
VCrop
press to toggle between Left/R and L/Rght• Left/R— adjusts the cropping of the left side
of the box mask• L/Rght—adjusts the cropping of the right side
of the box mask
Left/R
press to toggle between Top/B and T/Bttm• Top/B—adjusts the cropping of the top of the
box mask• T/Bttm— adjusts the cropping of the bottom
of the box mask
Top/B
36 • Keying — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Self KeysA Self Key is a key in which the luminance, orbrightness, values of the key source are used as the alphafor the key.
To Set Up a Self KeyA self key is set up by selecting the keyer and videosource you want to use, and adjusting the key parameters.
Tip: You can return the clip and gain values to the defaultsettings by pressing the Make Linear knob.
1. Select the keyer that you want to set up a Self Keyon. .
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
2. Select the video signal, on the key bus, that you wantto use for the key.
3. Press SELF KEY.4. Use theClip knob to remove lower-saturated colors
from the video image.5. Use the Gain knob to adjust the transition between
the video image and the parts of the video imagethat are removed.
6. Use the Transp knob to adjust the transparency ofthe key from opaque (0%) to fully transparent(100%).
7. Press NEXT.8. Use the Invert knob to reverse the polarity of the
key alpha (On) so that the holes in the backgroundare cut by dark areas of the key alpha instead ofbright areas.
9. Use the Mode knob to override the shaped settingfor the key.• Normal— set to a linear keyer for an unshaped
source.• Addtve — set to an additive keyer for a shaped
source. The Make Linear function is disabledin this mode.
• Full— set the alpha to fully opaque (white). TheClip, Gain, Make Linear, and Key Invertfunctions are disabled in this mode.
Note: Themode is reset toNormalwhen a different sourceis selected on the key bus, the alpha is changed, or amemory is recalled.
10. Press NEXT.11. Use the Mask knob to apply a mask to the key.12. Use the ShowAl knob have the preview output of
the current ME switch to the alpha signal that is
being used by the selected keyer (On) or have thenormal normal preview output (Off).Tip: Press and hold SHOWALPHA (CB1S, CB2S, CB3S,and CB3X only) to have the preview output of the currentME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by theselected keyer. Double press the SHOW ALPHA button tolock show alpha on and press it again to release it. Showalpha is not available for MiniME™ outputs.
Auto Select KeysAn Auto Select key is a key in which two video signalsare required to make the key. The alpha is used to cutthe hole in the video and the fill is used to fill the hole.These signals often originate from external devices suchas character generators, external still stores, or othergraphics systems.
To Set Up an Auto Select KeyAn auto select key is set up by selecting the keyer andvideo source you want to use, and adjusting the keyparameters. The pairing of the video and alpha videosignals is done when configuring video inputs. Refer tothe Setup Manual that came with your switcher forinformation on setting up Auto Keys.
Tip: You can return the clip and gain values to the defaultsettings by pressing the Make Linear knob.
1. Select the keyer that you want to set up an AutoSelect on.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
2. Select the video signal, on the key bus, that you wantto use for the key.
3. Press AUTO SELECT.4. Use theClip knob to remove lower-saturated colors
from the video image.5. Use the Gain knob to adjust the transition between
the video image and the parts of the video imagethat are removed.
6. Use the Transp knob to adjust the transparency ofthe key from opaque (0%) to fully transparent(100%).
7. Press NEXT.8. Use the Invert knob to reverse the polarity of the
key alpha (On) so that the holes in the backgroundare cut by dark areas of the key alpha instead ofbright areas.
9. Use the Mode knob to override the shaped settingfor the key.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Keying • 37
• Normal— set to a linear keyer for an unshapedsource.
• Addtve — set to an additive keyer for a shapedsource. The Make Linear function is disabledin this mode.
• Full— set the alpha to fully opaque (white). TheClip, Gain, Make Linear, and Key Invertfunctions are disabled in this mode.
Note: Themode is reset toNormalwhen a different sourceis selected on the key bus or the alpha is changed.
10. Press NEXT.11. Use the Mask knob to apply a mask to the key.12. Use the ShowAl knob have the preview output of
the current ME switch to the alpha signal that isbeing used by the selected keyer (On) or have thenormal normal preview output (Off).Tip: Press and hold SHOWALPHA (CB1S, CB2S, CB3S,and CB3X only) to have the preview output of the currentME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by theselected keyer. Double press the SHOW ALPHA button tolock show alpha on and press it again to release it. Showalpha is not available for MiniME™ outputs.
The Auto Select key uses the pre-assigned Auto Keyassociation to select the proper video and alpha. If youwant to temporarily select a different video source forthe alpha, press and hold the AUTO SELECT buttonand select the video source you want to use as the newfill.
UltraChrome 2 Chroma KeyAn UltraChrome Chroma Key is a key in which the holeis cut based on a color value, or hue, rather than aluminance value or alpha signal. The color is removedand replaced with background video from another source.The default color is blue.UltraChrome 2 can work in two modes, depending onthe lighting conditions and subject matter used for thechroma key.• Wedge Key — Based on the standard chroma keyer
and discriminates between the color vector angle andlevel of the background color vs the color vectors andlevels in the foreground components. This producesvery good results under ideal conditions. However,if the scene includes high detail luma content in edgeregions, these may not be included in the output.
• Detail Key — Differs from the standard chromakeyer in that it adds luminance dependency to athree-dimensional spherical color discriminator. Thischroma keyer can develop subtle video and alphashapes and discriminate high detail luma content inedge transition areas. However, this design may have
problems with content where background andforeground levels are similar within the video itself.
Tip: UltraChrome 2 also offers the option to combine these twomodes to offer good capture of high luma detail in the edgeregions as well as compensation for similar foreground andbackground levels.
UltraChrome 2 includes uniqueAutomatic BackgroundAnalysis that can develop key edges with luma valuesconsistent with those of the new background - eliminatingthe light or dark key halos. In addition, background colorvalues are averaged and can be applied to spill areas toadd lighting realism to the final composition.The UltraChrome 2 chroma keyer uses an independentchroma key engine to produce the video and alphacomponents of the key. These internal video streams canbe composited in an ME or MiniME™ keyer, or fed outtwo separate video streams to an external device, suchas a video server.
To Select the Chroma Key on a KeyerThe outputs of the chroma key engine must be selectedon a key bus to be properly keyed and to adjust thechroma key parameters.1. Press the KEY X SEL button for the keyer that you
want to view the chroma key on.2. Press AUTO SELECT.3. Press the CKX source button on the key bus for the
chroma key engine you want to use.
Tip: Instead of selecting CK as the source, click ChromaKey and click CKX for the chroma key you want to use.Click CK Params to navigate to the Chroma KeyParameters tab.
Note: When you select the chroma key engine on a bus,the key bus becomes assigned to that chroma key engineso that you can select a source for the chroma key.
To Set Up a Chroma KeySet up the chroma key with the source you want to useand adjust the parameters. Ensure that the chroma keyoutput has been selected on a keyer so that you can viewthe output as you adjust the parameters.
Tip: Click Mask to apply a mask to the key. Refer to Masks onpage 42 for information on setting up the mask.
Note: The Setup tab is used for debug purposes only.
1. Select the chroma key engine that you want to use.
Tip: You can either press the user select button assignedto the chroma key, press and hold the CHR KEY buttonand press the corresponding keyer button, or press thechroma key source button on the key bus.
38 • Keying — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
2. Press the source button on the key bus for the videofeed you want to apply the chroma key to.
Note: You can only select a physical input, Media-Store,or MediaWipe for a chroma key. You can also select anAux Bus, but the source selected on the Aux Bus must bevalid for the chroma key.
3. Use the Color knob to select the color of thebackground you are using for your chroma key.
4. Press Init.The chroma key engine initializes and attempts toremove the selected background color from thevideo. Any further adjust is only required if youwant to adjust aspects of the key.
5. Press NEXT.6. Use the Key Type knob to select the chroma key
mode you want to use.• Wedge — Based on the standard chroma keyer
and discriminates between the color vector angleand level of the background color vs the colorvectors and levels in the foreground components.
• Detail — Differs from the standard chromakeyer in that it adds luminance dependency to athree-dimensional spherical color discriminator.
• Combination — Combine the two modes tooffer good capture of high luma detail in the edgeregions as well as compensation for similarforeground and background levels.
Note: All adjustments are always available, even if the arenot applied by the selected mode.
Tip: Although adjustment can be made to either key typewhile the combined output is selected, it is recommendedthat adjustments of either key type be conducted with onlythat key type selected. This eliminates the possibility of thecombined key type hiding or concealing the result ofadjustments.
7. Press NEXT.8. For Detail Type, use the Type knob to selectDetail
and the Cntrl and Values knobs to adjust theparameters.
Tip: The Detail key type is layered over the Wedge keytype and has the largest contribution to the final key-edgequality.
• Clip — use this setting to clip between theforeground and background. You are looking toachieve complete background removal.
Tip: Clip should be set to the point where thebackground is just removed. Setting it too high willreduce edge quality.
• Gain — use this setting to lift the fill image.You are looking to achieve solid fill content.
Tip: Setting the gain too high may introduce darkboundaries.
• ShSens — use this setting to adjust the levelof dark image areas, particularly in cast shadowareas.
• ShDens — use this setting to adjust theapparent lightness of the dark / shadow areas inconjunction with the Shadow Sensitivity.
• HiSens — use this setting to fill areas withspecular highlights, such as reflective surfaces,that can show through to the background.
9. For Wedge Type, use the Type knob to selectWedge and the Cntrl and Values knobs to adjustthe parameters.• Gain — use this setting to set the Angle
Control to 100 and the Lift to 0 and then adjustthis setting until the background is fully removed,leaving a reasonable edge to the key. Too muchgain will produce hard and undesirable edges.
Tip: Adjust the Gain with the Bkgd Luma Suppressto balance between background removal and edgequality.
• BkLuma — use this setting to compensate foruneven color or lighting in the shot to ensure thechroma background is fully suppressed.
Tip: Turn on a box mask in the keyer you are using toview the chroma key output to compare thebackgrounds. Themasked area shows the backgroundsource without the key settings applied.
• Angle — use this setting to change the colorwedge angle (wedge shape) that is used to detectareas of foreground (fill) and background (alpha)based on the chosen color vector. This can helpfill in areas of heavy spill without hardening edgedetail.
• Lift — use this setting to amplify the generatedalpha signal to fill in areas of transparency.
• HiCorr — use this setting to lift areas of theimage might contain high luminance levels atedge boundaries. This could be due to lightingconditions, camera setup, or subject.
10. ClickMeasurement Src and select the backgroundvideo source that you want to place the chroma keyover. This source is used for the automaticadjustment of the chroma key.
11. Use the Type knob to select Global and the Cntrland Values knobs to adjust the parameters.• ChrAng— use this setting to select the fill color
that has been detected as color spill. You shouldnot have to adjust this setting.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Keying • 39
• EdgLum — use this setting to offset thedetected level of the chroma background andallow for fine tuning.
Tip: You can have the switcher automatically adjustthis setting in the next step.
Tip: If the subject image contains fine detail such asfine hair with a luminance level that is close in value tothe chroma set color background level – it may bedifficult to provide good separation between backgroundand foreground elements.
• EdgSof — use this setting to filter the edges toeliminate undesirable hard edges and add realismto a scene by simulating depth of fieldcharacteristics.
• ReSpil — use the ReSpil, RSCHue, andRSCSat settings to select a color that is nearthe average color of the background/lighting thatneeds to be added into those areas of the fill thatcontain the spill from the chroma set.
Tip: You can have the switcher automatically adjustthis setting in the next step.
12. Press NEXT.13. Use the automatic adjustments as follows:
Tip: TheAuto Adjust allows you to have the chroma keyercontinuously measure the replacement background, thebackground you are keying the subject onto, used in thefinal composite.
• Use the AutoAdjust knob to select MeasureSrc and use the Value knob to select the videosource that you want to place the chroma keyover. This source is used for the automaticadjustment of the chroma key.
• Use the AutoAdjust knob to selectAutoEdgeLuma and use the Value knob touse this auto adjustment (On) or not (Off).
• Use the AutoAdjust knob to selectAutoRspllCol and use the Value knob to usethis auto adjustment (On) or not (Off).
DVE KeysThe DVE key allows you to apply digital video effects,such as scale, crop, aspect ratio, position, and border toa video image or another key type. When the DVE isapplied to another key type, it is said to be flying (FlyKey).
Tip: You can see where DVE channels are allocated from theStatus page in DashBoard.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with a FlyKey:• The Fly Key feature consumes a single DVE channel
for self keys and chroma keys, but two DVE channelsfor an auto select key.
• The Fly Key feature cannot be applied to a DVE key.• The Key Invert feature is not available for a Fly Key.• The self key Fly Key can be used with all Canvas
layouts. The auto select key Fly Key can only be usedwith the Dual Vert or Dual Horiz Canvas layouts.
• A chroma key should be initialized and adjustedbefore the DVE (Fly Key) is applied to it.
• A DVE key will unfreeze when it is copied orswapped.
To Set Up a DVE KeyThe DVE engine allows you to apply digital video effects,such as scale, crop, aspect ratio, position, and border toa video image in 2D space.
The DVE resources for this key may not be available.Depending on how your switcher is configured, you maybe asked to steal the resources from another element, orbe prevented from using the resources.
Note: The DVE Freeze feature is only available in SD/HD videomodes.
1. Select the keyer that you want to set up a DVE keyon.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
2. Select the video signal, on the key bus, that you wantto use for the key.
3. Press DVE.4. Use the X Pos, Y Pos, and Size knobs to position
and size the key. You can also use the positioner.5. Press NEXT.6. Use the Aspect knob to adjust the aspect ratio of
the key.7. Use the Border and Soft knobs to apply a border
to the key.Refer to the section To Apply a Border/Edge Softnessto a DVE Key on page 41 for information onborders.
8. Press NEXT. If you have applied a border to thekey, additional NEXT presses may be required.
9. Crop the key horizontally as follows:
40 • Keying — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
a) Use the HCrop knob to crop the keyhorizontally on both the left and right sides atthe same time.
b) Press HCrop and use the Left/R knob to cropthe key horizontally on the left side only.
c) Press Left/R and use the L/Rgt knob to cropthe key horizontally on the right side only.
10. Crop the key vertically as follows:a) Use the VCrop knob to crop the key vertically
on both the top and bottom sides at the sametime.
b) Press VCrop and use the Top/B knob to cropthe key vertically on the top side only.
c) Press Top/B and use the T/Bttm knob to cropthe key vertically on the bottom side only.
11. Press NEXT.12. Use the Freeze knob (SD/HD only) to freeze the
key. You can freeze the video and appearance of akey. When a key is frozen, the DVE attribute menusare disabled and you can not move the key or adjustDVE attributes.
13. Press NEXT.14. Use the Mask knob to apply a mask to the key.15. Use the ShowAl knob have the preview output of
the current ME switch to the alpha signal that isbeing used by the selected keyer (On) or have thenormal normal preview output (Off).Tip: Press and hold SHOWALPHA (CB1S, CB2S, CB3S,and CB3X only) to have the preview output of the currentME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by theselected keyer. Double press the SHOW ALPHA button tolock show alpha on and press it again to release it. Showalpha is not available for MiniME™ outputs.
To Apply a DVE to a Key (Fly Key)The Fly key is when the DVE engine is applied to anotherkey type.
The DVE resources for this key may not be available.Depending on how your switcher is configured, you maybe asked to steal the resources from another element, orbe prevented from using the resources.You should set up your key as you want it beforeapplying the Fly Key.1. Press and hold SELF KEY, AUTO SELECT, or
CHR KEY for the key you want to apply the DVEto and press DVE.
Tip: Hold the SELF KEY, AUTO SELECT, or CHR KEYbutton again and press DVE to turn off the Fly Key.
2. Press the KEY X SEL button for the key you aresetting up.
3. Use the X Pos, Y Pos, and Size knobs to positionand size the key. You can also use the positioner.
4. Press NEXT.5. Use the Aspect knob to adjust the aspect ratio of
the key.6. Use the Edge knob to apply a border to the key.
Refer to the section To Apply a Border/Edge Softnessto a DVE Key on page 41 for information.
7. Press NEXT. If a border is applied to the pattern,you must press NEXT multiple times to get to thenext step.
8. Crop the key horizontally as follows:a) Use the HCrop knob to crop the key
horizontally on both the left and right sides atthe same time.
b) Press HCrop and use the Left/R knob to cropthe key horizontally on the left side only.
c) Press Left/R and use the L/Rgt knob to cropthe key horizontally on the right side only.
9. Crop the key vertically as follows:a) Use the VCrop knob to crop the key vertically
on both the top and bottom sides at the sametime.
b) Press VCrop and use the Top/B knob to cropthe key vertically on the top side only.
c) Press Top/B and use the T/Bttm knob to cropthe key vertically on the bottom side only.
10. Use the Freeze knob (SD/HD only) to freeze thekey. You can freeze the video and appearance of akey. When a key is frozen, the DVE attribute menusare disabled and you can not move the key or adjustDVE attributes.
11. Use the Mask knob to apply a mask to the key.
To Apply a Border/Edge Softness to a DVE KeyA DVE border or edge softness is applied to the edgesof the DVE key and is manipulated as part of the key.
Note: You can only apply a border to a DVE key. Fly Keys, suchas chroma keys or auto select keys with DVE applied to themcannot have a border applied to them. Instead, the selection isEdge Softness and is used to soften the edges of the key withoutany color.
1. Select the keyer that you want to set up a DVE keyborder/edge softness on.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ orCanvas.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Keying • 41
2. Select the video signal, on the key bus, that you wantto use for the key.
3. Press DVE.4. Use the Border knob to turn on the border and
adjust the size of the border around the key.5. Use the Soft knob to adjust the softness of the
border.6. Press NEXT.7. Select a default or custom color for the border
(borders only).• Default — use the Load knob to select a preset
color for the border.• Custom — press NEXT and use the BHue,
BSat, and BLum knobs to select your owncolor.
Show AlphaThe SHOW ALPHA button allows you to route theprocessed alpha for the selected keyer to the previewoutput for the ME you are working on, as well as the lastavailable aux bus.Show alpha is not available on a MiniME™ or Canvas.• Select the keyer that you want to show the alpha for
and press and hold the SHOW ALPHA button. Thepreview output of the ME shows the processed alphaof the selected key until the button is released.
• Select the keyer that you want to show the alpha forand double-press the SHOW ALPHA button. Thepreview output of the ME shows the processed alphaof the selected key until the button is pressed again.
• Select the keyer that you want to show the alpha forand press NEXT > NEXT and use the ShowAl toturn the show alpha on (On) or off (Off). The previewoutput of the ME shows the processed alpha of theselected key until Off is selected.
MasksA Mask is a technique in which a pattern is combinedwith the key source to block out unwanted portions ofthe key source.Two types of masks are available, Box masks and Patternmasks. All key types can be masked.• Box Mask — uses a simple box shape to mask out a
portion of the key• Pattern Mask — uses a pattern from the pattern
generator to mask out a portion of the key
Note: Pattern masks are not supported in UHDTV1.
To Pattern Mask a Key (SD/HD Only)Pattern masks can be adjusted for size, location, rotation,and multiplication.1. Select the keyer that you want to set up a mask for.2. PressNEXT. Depending on the key type and features
set up for the key, you must press NEXT multipletimes to get to the next step.
3. Use the Mask knob to select Pattrn.4. Press Edit Params.5. Use the M-Frce knob to force the area inside the
mask region to the foreground (On).Force mask is not available for all key types.
6. Use the M-Inv knob to invert the masked area withthe unmasked area (On).The portion of the key that was masked out is nowvisible, and the portion that was visible is masked.
7. Press NEXT.8. Use the Size knob to adjust the size of the mask
region. You can also twist the positioner.9. Press NEXT.10. Use the Pattrn knob to select the mask pattern you
want to use. You can also select the pattern bypressing the pattern button directly.
11. Use the X Pos and Y Pos knobs to position themask. You can also use the positioner.
12. Press NEXT.13. Use the Aspect knob to adjust the aspect ratio of
the mask.Not all patterns can be adjusted.
14. Use the Border and Soft knobs to apply a borderto the mask.Refer to the section To Apply a Border to a Patternon page 31 for information on borders.
15. Press NEXT. If a border is applied to the pattern,you must press NEXT multiple times to get to thenext step.
16. Use the Rot knob to rotate the pattern.Not all patterns can be rotated.
17. Use the HMult knob to multiply the patternhorizontally.
18. Use the VMult knob to multiply the patternvertically.
To Box Mask a KeyBox masks can be adjusted for size, location, rotation,and multiplication.
42 • Keying — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
1. Select the keyer that you want to set up a mask for.2. PressNEXT. Depending on the key type and features
set up for the key, you must press NEXT multipletimes to get to the next step.
3. Use the Mask knob to select Box.4. Use the M-Frce knob to force the area inside the
mask region to the foreground (On).Force mask is not available for all key types.
5. Use the M-Inv knob to invert the masked area withthe unmasked area (On).The portion of the key that was masked out is nowvisible, and the portion that was visible is masked.
6. Press NEXT.7. Use the X Pos and Y Pos knobs to position the
mask. You can also use the positioner.8. Use the Size knob to adjust the size of the mask
region. You can also twist the positioner.9. Press NEXT.10. Adjust the position of the left and right sides of the
box mask as follows:a) Use the Left/R knob to adjust the position of
the left side of the box mask.b) Press the Left/R knob.c) Use the L/Right knob to adjust the position of
the right side of the box mask.
11. Adjust the position of the top and bottom sides ofthe box mask as follows:a) Use the Top/B knob to adjust the position of
the top side of the box mask.b) Press the Top/B knob.c) Use the T/Bttm knob to adjust the position of
the bottom side of the box mask.
Split KeysA Split key allows you to assign a different alpha sourcefor a key than the fill/alpha associations that are set upduring configuration, or to use a separate alpha sourcefor a Self key.A split key can be applied to an AUTO SELECT, orSELF KEY.
To Set Up a Split KeyA split key works on an Auto Select or Self Key thathas been set up and you want to apply a different alphato.1. Set up your key with the video source you want to
use.
2. Press and hold the Auto Select or Self Key,depending on the key type you are splitting.
3. Press the source button on the key bus for the alphasource you want to use.
Tip: If the new alpha source is not assigned to a sourcebutton, press any other button on the key bus and use theAlpha knob to select a different alpha source.
Key CopyYou can copy the entire contents of a keyer to anotherkeyer in the same, or a different ME. The entire contentsof the destination keyer are replaced with the contentsof the source keyer.When you copy a key, the switcher tries to assignresources to the destination key to match the source key.If these resources are not available, the switcher stealsresources in the following order.1. From off-air keys that are not the source key.2. From the source key, if it is not on-air.3. From on-air keys that are not the source key.4. From the source key, even if it is on-air.
To Copy a KeyThis procedure copies the contents of Key 1 to Key 3 asan example. Use the same procedure for any keycombination.1. Press and hold the KEY 3 SEL button.
This is the destination keyer that you want to copyto.
2. Press the KEY 1 SEL button.This is the source keyer that you want to copy from.
Key SwapYou can swap the entire contents of any two keyers inthe same, or different MEs. The video source, position,and key type are all swapped between keyers. This allowsyou to change the apparent key priority, or layering, ofthe keys in the video output. For example, key 3 appearsover key 2. If you perform a swap between key 3 andkey 2, it appears as if key 2 is now over key 3.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when performing a key swap:• Key swap does not change the on-air status of a keyer.• A key swap can be recorded as part of a custom
control.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Keying • 43
To Perform a Key SwapThis procedure swaps the contents of Key 2 and Key 3as an example. Use the same procedure for any keycombination.1. Press and hold the KEY 2 SEL button.2. Press the KEY 3 button in the next transition area.
44 • Keying — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Memory FunctionsA memory register is a snapshot of the current state ofthe switcher that can include one or multiple ME,MiniME™, Canvas, or chroma key outputs. Up to 100memory registers per ME, MiniME™, Canvas, or chromakey can be stored and recalled on the switcher. Each ofthese memory registers can store as little as theinformation of one ME, or as much as the current stateof the entire switcher, including all ME, MiniME™,Canvas, chroma key outputs, Aux Buses, and DVEsettings.
Memory Access ModeSwitcher memories can be accessed either throughDirectAccess or Bank mode.• Direct Access— enter the bank and memory number
to store or recall a memory• Bank — enter the memory number to store or recall
a memory (the bank is locked)
To Set the Memory Access ModeThe memory access mode applies to both memory storingand recalling.1. Press STORE.2. Use the Mode knob to select the memory access
mode you want to use.
Storing MemoriesWhen you store a memory, you are storing the completestate of that panel row. This includes the current state ofall the areas on the ME, including keyer settings,transition rates, wipe and pattern selections, and sourceselections. In addition to the current state of the panel,the current settings for the various keyers, such as chromakey settings, and clip and gain settings, are also stored.
Tip: Double-press theSTORE button to lock thememory systemin store mode. The menu system remains in store mode untilyou press RECALL.
To Store a Memory on DashBoardHow to store a memory using DashBoard.1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
Memory > Store.2. In the Inclusions area, select the ME, MiniME™,
Canvas, and chroma key outputs that you want tostore the memory for.
Tip: You can deselect all inclusions for a memory so thatit doesn't affect these areas. This can be used to create amemory that only recalls Media-Store or Aux bus selections.
3. In the Memory Store area, click the Bank X andMem X button for the bank and memory registerthat you want to store to.
Tip: The button will be lit if that memory register alreadyhas a memory stored in it.
4. Click Store to store the memory.
To Store a Memory on the CB1 and CB2How to store a memory using the source buttons on theCB1 and CB2 control panels.
Note: This procedure only applies to the CB1, CB2, and CB9.
To store a memory, you must select which ME,MiniME™, or Canvas to store the memory for, and thenuse the mnemonic buttons to select the bank and registerto store the memory in.1. Press and holdSTORE and select the source buttons
on the key bus to select the ME, Canvas, MiniME™,or chroma key that you want to store the memoryfor.
Note: If you have a CB9 control panel, you may not beable to access all Canvas or chroma key outputs.
• 1 — ME P/P• 2 — ME 1• 3 — ME 2• 4 — MiniME™ 1• 5 — MiniME™ 2• 6 — MiniME™ 3• 7 — MiniME™ 4• 8 — Canvas 1• 9 — Canvas 2• 10 — Chrome Key 1• 11 — Chroma Key 2• 12 — Chroma Key 3• 13 — Chroma Key 4
2. Use the numbers on the mnemonic buttons to selectthe bank and register you want to store the memoryto.
Tip: The button will be lit if that memory register alreadyhas a memory stored in it.
The memory has been stored to the selected memoryregister and the ME X RECALL button is selected.
To Store aMemory on the Effects Memory AreaHow to store a memory using the Effects Memory areaon the control panel.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Memory Functions • 45
Tip: Double-press theSTORE button to lock thememory systemin store mode. The menu system remains in store mode untilyou press RECALL.
Note: This procedure does NOT apply to the CB1, CB2, andCB9.
1. Press STORE in the Effects Memory area for theME you want to store the memory to.
2. Select the recall mode that you want to store withthe memory. Toggle the button on (lit) to have itstored with the memory.• PGM — selects the PGM recall mode• MEM AI — selects the Memory AI recall mode• EFF DISS— selects the Effects Dissolve recall
mode
3. Press BANK.4. Press the number for the bank you want to select.5. Press the number for the memory register you want
to select.
Tip: The button will be lit if that memory register alreadyhas a memory stored in it.
The memory is stored in the selected location and theEffect Memory area is assigned to recall.
To Store a Memory on the Global Memory AreaHow to store a memory using the Global Memory areaon the control panel.
Note: This procedure does not apply to the CB1, CB2, or CB9.
1. Press STORE next to the display.2. Select the ME, Canvas, MiniME™, or chroma key
outputs that you want to store the memory for.3. Use the numbers on the mnemonic buttons to select
the bank and register you want to store the memoryto.
Tip: The button will be lit if that memory register alreadyhas a memory stored in it.
The memory is stored in the selected location and theGlobal Memory area is assigned to recall.
Recalling MemoriesWhen you recall a memory, the existing configurationof that ME is replaced with the settings stored in thememory.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when recalling memories:
• How a memory is recalled depends on the how theMemory Attributes are set.
• Recalling a memory that includes a new Media-Storeimage to be loaded from a USB drive may result inthe currently loaded image to be displayed for a fewframes while the new image is loaded.
• Recalling a memory that includes a source assignedto a camera also recalls the shot stored in the memoryfor that camera if the CamRcl memory attribute isset toRecall. There is no delay in the memory recallso camera movement may be visible while the shotis recalled.
• You can exit without recalling a memory register bypressing any button other than a Wipe Pattern,dedicated key transition, CUT, AUTO TRANS, orsource button.
• You can override the video source stored in a memoryby pressing and holding a source button and recallingthe memory (Bus Hold). The held source buttonoverrides the source that is recalled with the memoryfor that bus. The memory is not affected by a BusHold and will recall properly without the Bus Hold.
• Enabling Memory AI mode changes the way keyelements are recalled. If a key is currently on-air, theelement for that key is recalled in the next availableoff-air key. If there is no available off-air keys, theelement is not recalled. All resource sharing is set toFLOAT mode so that key elements may be recalledto other keys than originally stored.
To Recall a Memory on DashBoardHow to recall a memory using DashBoard.1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
Memory > Recall.2. In the Inclusions area, select the ME, MiniME™,
Canvas, and chroma key outputs that you want toperform the memory recall on.
Tip: You can deselect all inclusions for a memory so thatit doesn't affect these areas. This can be used to create amemory that only recalls Media-Store or Aux bus selections.
3. In the Memory Recall area, click the Bank Xbutton for the bank you want to recall a memoryfrom.
4. Click the Mem XX button to recall the memory.
Tip: Click Undo to undo the last memory recall.
To Recall a Memory on the CB1 and CB2How to recall a memory using the source buttons on theCB1 and CB2 control panels.
Note: This procedure only applies to the CB1, CB2, and CB9.
46 • Memory Functions — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
To recall a memory, you must select which ME,MiniME™, Canvas, or chroma key outputs to recall thememory for, and then use the mnemonic buttons to selectthe bank and register to recall the memory from.1. Press and hold RECALL and select the source
buttons on the key bus to select the ME, MiniME™
or Canvas that you want to recall the memory for.• 1 — ME P/P• 2 — ME 1• 3 — ME 2• 4 — MiniME™ 1• 5 — MiniME™ 2• 6 — MiniME™ 3• 7 — MiniME™ 4• 8 — Canvas 1• 9 — Canvas 2• 10 — Chrome Key 1• 11 — Chroma Key 2• 12 — Chroma Key 3• 13 — Chroma Key 4
2. Use the numbers on the mnemonic buttons to selectthe bank and register you want to recall the memoryfrom.
Tip: Press the memory number button again to undo thelast recall. This can be turned off from the Personalitymenu.
ToRecall aMemory on the EffectsMemory AreaHow to recall a memory using the Effects Memory areaon some control panels.
Note: This procedure does NOT apply to the CB1, CB2, andCB9.
1. PressRecall in the Effects Memory area for the MEyou want to recall the memory to.
2. Select the recall mode that you want use with thememory. Toggle the button on (lit) to select the recallmode, or toggle none of them on to have the memoryrecalled as it was stored.• PGM — selects the PGM recall mode• MEM AI — selects the Memory AI recall mode• EFF DISS— selects the Effects Dissolve recall
mode
3. Press BANK.4. Press the number for the bank you want to select.5. Press the number for the memory register you want
to select.
Tip: Press the memory number button again to undo thelast recall. This can be turned off from the Personalitymenu.
To Recall a Memory on the Global Memory AreaHow to recall a memory using the Global Memory areaon the control panel.
Note: This procedure does not apply to the CB1, CB2, or CB9.
To recall a memory, you must select which ME to recallthe memory for, and then use the pattern buttons to selectthe bank and register to recall the memory from.1. Press RECALL next to the display.2. Select the MEs, Canvass, or MiniME™s that you
want to recall the memory for.3. Use the numbers on the mnemonic buttons to select
the bank and register you want to recall the memoryfrom.
Tip: Press the memory number button again to undo thelast recall. This can be turned off from the Personalitymenu.
Memory Recall ModeThe Memory Recall mode sets how a memory isrecalled. This includes whether a memory is recalledon-air, or only on the program bus, or if effects such asEffects Dissolve or DVE Dissolve are used.
To Set Up the Recall Mode Memory AttributeThe recall mode sets how memories are recalled.1. Press RECALL > NEXT.2. Use the Attrib knob to select Recall Mode.3. Use the Value knob to select the memory recall
mode you want to use.• Memory — the memory recall mode (PGM,
MemAI, or EffDis) stored with the memory isused
• PGM — all elements are recalled as stored(default)
• MemAI — current on-air elements areunchanged and the transition area is configuredto take the on-air elements of the memory on-airwith the next transition
• EffDis — on-air elements listed below aretransitioned to the elements stored in the memory• Matte colors (background, wash or borders)• Keyer settings like clip, gain, transparency• Mask position and size
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Memory Functions • 47
• Chroma key settings, except the backgroundcolor
• Pattern settings like size, position, aspect,border, softness, rotation
• DVE settings like size, position, aspect,border, softness, cropping
• Media-Store x/y position• Transition Progress
To Set the Effects DurationEffects duration applies to Effects Dissolves, and setsthe length of time that the switcher will use to transitionfrom the on-air scene to the scene stored in the memory.
Tip: Press EFF DISS in the Effects Memory area to turn EffectsDissolve on (lit) or off (unlit) for that ME. Not available on theCB1 and CB2.
1. Press RECALL > NEXT.
Tip: If you want to store the effects dissolve rate in thememory, press STORE > NEXT.
2. Use the Attrib knob to select EffDur.3. Use the Value knob to select duration you want to
use to transition from the current on-air scene to theone stored in the memory.• Memory — the duration stored in the memory
is used• 1-999fr — sets a specific duration in frames
Tip: Press EFF RATE in the Effects Memory area for theME you want to change the rate for, use the keypad to enterthe new rate, and press Enter. A value of 0 selects theduration stored in the memory. Not available on the CB1and CB2.
Memory AttributesMemory Attributes allow you to specify what elementsare recalled with a memory, as well as adding effects tomemory recalls. These elements include thebackground/preset buses, keyer bus, Aux bus, andMedia-Store selections, as well as keyer on-air status,and transition selections.In addition to setting which sources to recall with thememory, effects such as performing an auto transitionafter the memory recall or running a custom control afterthe memory recall, can also be included.Memory attributes can be set both when the memory isstored, and when it is recalled. This allows you to storea set of attributes with a memory and then recall it asstored, or override the attributes stored in the memoryand apply different ones when the memory is recalled.
A memory attribute does not need to be stored in thememory to be recalled.
Tip: It is recommended that if you are new to working withmemories, use the memory store attributes to set how you wanta memory to be recalled and set the recall attributes to beMemory.
To Set the Memory AttributesMemory attributes can be set when the memory is storedor when it is recalled. This procedure sets the recallattributes, but the information applies to both.1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
Memory > Recall.2. In the Inclusions area, select the ME, MiniME™,
and Canvas that you want to include with thememory recall.Only those MEs that are included with the memoryrecall are changed when a memory is recalled.
Tip: Click the attribute button multiple times to have thatattribute included with the recall ( ), not included with therecall ( ), or use the setting stored in the memory ( ).
3. Click the tab you want to set the attributed on andselect the attributes that you want recalled with thememory. Use the following table to identify theattributes you want to set.
Table 3: Memory Attributes
DescriptionName
General
Set whether a play command is triggered whena source that is assigned to a video server isrecalled.
RollClip
Set whether camera shots are recalled.Camera
Set whether the chroma key source andsettings are recalled.
OverrideChromaKey XInclusion
Set whether Media-Store image and settingsfor the selected channel are recalled.
MediaX
ME X/MiniME 1-4/Canvases
Set how the next transition type andparameters are recalled.
TransArea
Set how the next transition area is recalled.NextTrans
Set whether a transition is performed after thememory is recalled. (Not available duringEffects Dissolve transitions.)
Run Auto
Set how the sources selected on the programbus are recalled.
PGM Bus
Set how the sources selected on the presetbus are recalled.
PST Bus
48 • Memory Functions — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionName
Set whether the settings for the shared KeyMask/Wash pattern generator is recalled.
SharedPattern
Set whether sources selected on the selectedkey bus are recalled.
Key XBus
Set whether sources selected on the selectedkey bus are recalled.
Key XActive
Set whether the key type is recalled for theselected key.
Key XType
Set whether mask settings for the selected keyare recalled.
Key XMask
Chroma Key
Set whether sources selected on the chromakey buses are recalled.
Source
Set whether chroma key settings are recalled.Parameters
Auxes
Set whether the sources selected on the auxbuses are recalled.
AuxX
Deleting a Memory or BankYou can delete the contents of a single memory or anentire bank. Only one memory or bank can be cleared ata time, and you cannot undo the deletion.
Tip: You can clear all memories from the switcher from thecontrol panel. (Press MENU > Reset > NEXT > NEXT.)
To Delete a MemoryAn individual memory or bank can only be deleted usingDashBoard.1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
Memory > Store2. In the Memory Store area, click the Bank X and
Mem X button for the memory register that youwant to delete.
3. Click Delete Memory.
Clear MemoriesYou can clear all the memory registers on the switcherso that they are all empty. This deletes all the contentsof the memories.You cannot clear individual memory registers.
To Clear the Memory RegistersDelete all the memories on the switcher from the controlpanel.1. Press MENU > Reset > NEXT > NEXT.
2. Press the Clear Mems knob to clear the memoryregisters.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Memory Functions • 49
Switcher SetsThe switcher stores configuration and operation data ina number of registers that contain the individual entriesfor items such as memories or personality settings. Theseregisters can be stored as a single archive file, or as aregister set that contains all the individual register of thattype; all memories for example. These files are storedinto Sets on USB drive. Different Sets can be created fordifferent shows or applications, allowing you to quicklylocate and recall the switcher configurations.The switcher stores information in the following registers:• Memory — contains all the memories for ME,
MiniME™, and Canvas.• Custom Control — contains all the custom control
banks and macros.• Personality— contains all the user interface settings,
such as transition rates, that are stored under thePersonality menu. Some personality settings arespecific to the control panel and can be storedindependently if you are working with a MultiPanelsystem.
• Installation— contains all the external device setup,and software settings for the switcher.
To Store a SetSwitcher Sets can only be stored to a USB drive. TheUSB drive must be present before you try to store theSet. A total of 10 Sets of switcher setup information canbe stored onto the same USB drive.
Note: If you are updating an older setup file, you must performa Recall All followed by a Store All. This updates the setup filesthe latest format. You can then make changes and store toindividual registers if needed.
1. Insert a USB drive into the USB Port on the frameor control panel. You must wait 5 seconds for theswitcher to recognise the USB drive.
2. Press MENU > Save.3. Press Frame-USB or Panel-USB to save the set
file to the USB drive installed into the frame orcontrol panel.
4. Use the All knob to select the set (0-9) you want tostore the switcher registers to.
5. Press the knob to select the registers you want tostore to the selected set. If an (*) is shown on themenu, that register already exist in the set and willbe overwritten.• All — store all registers to the set.• Mems— store only the memory registers to the
set.
• Cust — store only the custom control registersto the set.
• Inst— store only the installation registers to theset.
• PersX — store only the personality registers tothe set. Use the Pers knob to select whether toinclude the personality setting for all panels(PersA) or only the current panel (PersM/1/2).
6. Press Confrm.
To Load a SetSwitcher Sets can only be loaded from a USB drive. TheUSB drive must be present before you try to load thesettings.
Note: If you are updating an older setup file, you must performa Recall All followed by a Store All. This updates the setup filesthe latest format. You can then make changes and store toindividual registers if needed.
1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on theframe or control panel. You must wait 5 seconds forthe switcher to recognise the USB drive.
2. Press MENU > Load.3. Press Frame-USB or Panel-USB to load the set
file from the USB drive installed into the frame orcontrol panel.
4. Use the All knob to select the set (0-9) you want toload the switcher registers from.
5. Press the selected set. Only registers with an (*)shown on the menu exist in the set.• All — recall all registers from the set.• Mems— recall only the memory registers from
the set.• Cust — recall only the custom control registers
from the set.• Inst— recall only the installation registers from
the set.• Pers— recall only the personality registers from
the set. Use the Pers knob to select whether toinclude the personality setting for all panels(PersA) or only a specific panel (PersM/1/2).
6. Press Confrm.
50 • Switcher Sets — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Media-StoreMedia-Store allows you to load stills, animations, oraudio files from the USB drive and make them availableacross all MEs. Up to 4 (2 in UHDTV1) independentchannels of video with alpha for playout of stills andanimations are available switcher-wide.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with theMedia-Store:• A still, animation, or audio can be loaded either by
browsing the file system, or by entering the stillnumber using the pattern buttons.
• You can clear a Media-Store channel by loadingmedia number 000.
• If you are loading an Auto Key into a Media-Storechannel, you must have another Media-Store channelassociated with the current one to load the alpha into.
• An FTP connection using RossLinq can be createdfrom an external device directly to a Media-Storechannel on the switcher.
• If you delete a media item from the USB, you mayhave to load that media item into a Media-Storechannel for the switcher to prompt you to delete themedia item from the database.
• Media items must be created in the same color gamutand dynamic range that they are intended to be usedin on the switcher. If a media item is created in onecolor space and the switcher is operating in another,the media item may not appear correctly.
Working With Media-StoreAnimations
Media-Store animations are used for things animatedbackgrounds, branding "bugs", or media transitions. Youcan set up an animation to loop, play automatically whentake on-air, play in reverse, or even play at differentspeeds.You can play an animation manually by selecting thesource button for the Media-Store channel with theanimation you want to play, and pressingRun. The knobchanged to Stop as the animation is playing.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working withMedia-Store animations:• When you load an animation to an off-air Media-Store
channel, or the animation goes off-air with a
transition, the preview shows the cut point (CutFr)for that animation, and not the first frame of the video.
• You can manually cycle through frames by turningthe Run knob while the animation is stopped.
• Double-pressing the Run knob stops playback andre-cues the animation to the first frame.
• You can shuttle forwards and backwards through theanimation by turning the positioner clockwise oranti-clockwise when the animation is stopped. Shuttlespeed is increased and decreased by turning thepositioner more or less in each direction.
• You can run or stop an animation by pressing thebutton on the top of the positioner.
Working With Media-Store AudioAudio can be added to the playout of a Media-Storechannel either by loading the file directly, or by namingthe audio file the same as the animation or still you wantit to play out with. When you load the still or animation,the switcher will automatically load the audio file of thesame name.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working withMedia-Store audio:• Media-Store audio is only available on the AES
output assigned to the Media-Store or MediaWipechannel.
• Audio files must be 20-bit or 24-bit wav files at a48kHz sample rate.
• Audio files must be in the same folder and have thesame name as the still or animation they are to beassociated with.
• An audio file does not need to be of the same lengthas the animation it is associated with.
• A still with audio or audio only have the Auto Playand Looping attributes. These apply to the audioplayout.
• The looping time of an animation with audio is thelength of the animation.
• A Media-Store channel can be loaded with Audioonly.
Media-Store Audio OutputThe audio output from the Media-Store is only availableon the AES outputs of the frame.Only Media-Store channels 1 and 2, and the MediaWipechannels can be assigned to an AES output. Embeddedaudio is not available on the AES outputs.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Media-Store • 51
To Assign Media-Store Audio to an AES OutputAudio must be assigned to one of the AES outputs onthe frame.1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT
> Output Config > NEXT.
Tip: Some outputs can have color correction applied tothem. You will have to pressNEXT again to get toAESOut.
2. Use theAESOut knob to select the AES output thataudio will be available on.
3. Use the Source knob to select the audio source forthe selected AES output.• none— no audio source is assigned to the AES
output.• MX— the audio from Media-Store X is assigned
to the AES output.• MEXMW — the audio from the MediaWipe on
ME X is assigned to the AES output.
Loading Stills or AnimationsStills or animations can be loaded into Media-Storechannels either from USB or the internal cache using themedia number, or by browsing to the file.
Note: The internal cache is used for sample images only andcannot be used to store user stills or animations.
Media numbers are 4-digit numbers that are assigned tostills or animations and allow you to load stills oranimations directly using the pattern buttons. Each medianumber is made up of three sections, the Place (0-1), theBank (00-99), and the Item Number (0-9). The Place iseither 0 for internal stills, or 1 for external.
Media-Store File SpecificationsMedia-Store images and animations can be TGA, PNG,or JPG file formats. For animations, the files must benumbered to indicate the order they go in, and the nameand the number must be separated with an underscore.For audio, 20-bit or 24-bit wav files of the same nameas the still or animation are used to associate audio witha still or animation.• Anim_001.tga• Anim_002.tga• Anim_003.tga• ...• Anim_100.tgaTogether, these files are treated as a single animationnamed Anim that is 100 frames long.
Note: Media items must be created in the same color gamutand dynamic range that they are intended to be used in on theswitcher. If a media item is created in one color space and the
switcher is operating in another, the media item may not appearcorrectly.
Note: An animation must start with _001 at the end of thename of the first frame.
Files names cannot contain symbols such as ! @ # & *( ) / , ? ' " and cannot start with an underscore (_).
Animation File SizeThe number of frames that an animation can havedepends on the raster size of the frames in the animations.Compressed image formats are uncompressed inside theswitcher and an alpha is applied when the file is loadedinto the Media-Store.
Note: Media-Store channels 1 and 3 share one block of RAMand channels 2 and 4 share another. As you load an animationinto one channel in the block, the amount of RAM available tothe other channel is reduced.
M4M2M3M1Raster
--123--1233840×2160(UHDTV1)
4944941920×1080 (1080p)
110511051280×720 (720p)
To Load a Still or AnimationStills or animations can be loaded from the USB drive,or from the internal cache. Only the default images thatcame with your switcher are available on the internalcache.
Note: Media items must be created in the same color gamutand dynamic range that they are intended to be used in on theswitcher. If a media item is created in one color space and theswitcher is operating in another, the media item may not appearcorrectly.
1. If you are loading a file from USB, insert your USBdrive into the USB Port on the switcher. You mustwait 5 seconds for the switcher to recognise the USBdrive.If the files on your USB are new, it takes about 2seconds per file for the switcher to generate thethumbnail for the MediaManager. Once all thethumbnails are generated, they are displayed in theMediaManager window.
2. Press the source button for the Media-Store channelthat you want to load a still into. If the file has analpha, the paired channel will load the alpha as well.
3. Press the Browse knob.4. Use the left knob to navigate to the file you want to
load. Press the knob to make a selection.• <..> — up one
52 • Media-Store — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
• USB(1) — the USB drive• Internal(0) — the internal cache• <folder> — a sub-folder of the name "folder"• image — a still of the name "image"• image.tga .wav — a still with an associated
audio file (not in the database)• image [V][A]— a still with an associated audio
file (in the database)• animation [V10] — a 10 frame animation of
the name "animation" (in the database)• animation.tga[10] .wav — a 10 frame
animation with an associated audio file (not inthe database)
• animation [V10][A] — a 10 frame animationwith an associated audio file (in the database)
Tip: If you want to associate an audio file with the still oranimation but the .wav does not appear in the name, ensurethat the audio file is named the same as the still oranimation and in the same folder.
A still or animation can be loaded using the MediaNumber for the still and the pattern buttons.
To Load Stills Using Media NumbersHow you load a still using the media number dependson whether the Place or Media are locked. If the Placeis locked, you only have to enter the 3-digit Medianumber. If the Place and Media are locked, you only haveto enter the last digit of the Media number.
Note: Loading 000 clears the current Media-Store channel.
1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on theswitcher. You must wait 5 seconds for the switcherto recognise the USB drive. If you are loading a filefrom the internal cache, you do not need the USBdrive.
2. Press the source button for the Media-Store channelthat you want to load a still into. If the file has analpha, the paired channel will load the alpha as well.
3. Using the pattern buttons, enter the media numberfor the still you want to load.For example, press 1051 to select the USB(1) drive,Media 051.
4. Press Select.
Media-Store CaptureStill images can be captured from any input BNC, as wellas the program, preview, and clean feed from any ME.
To Capture a Still From the Panel1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on the
switcher. You must wait 5 seconds for the switcherto recognise the USB drive.
2. Press the source button for the Media-Store channelthat you want to capture a still into.
3. Press the Capt knob.4. Press the P/B or E/E knob to select the mode you
want the Media-Store in.• E/E— electronic-to-electronic, or record, mode
allows you to record a still• P/B — playback mode allows you to review
your still
5. Use the P/B or E/E knob to select the video sourcethat you want to perform the capture of.
6. Press NEXT.7. Use the Alpha knob to select whether you want to
capture the alpha signal (Yes) or not (No). Youmust have an input BNC selected as the capturesource to capture the alpha.
8. Press NEXT.9. Use the Capt knob to select a number for the still
you want to capture.10. Press the Capt knob to perform the capture. The
new media item is stored and the media number isincreased by one.
To Capture a Still from DashBoard1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on the
switcher. You must wait 5 seconds for the switcherto recognise the USB drive.
2. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >Capture.
3. Click MediaStore1 or MediaStore2 to selectwhich Media-Store you want to use for the capture.
4. Click the Display button to select the mode youwant the Media-Store in.• E/E— electronic-to-electronic, or record, mode
allows you to record a still• P/B — playback mode allows you to review
your still
5. Click theSource button and select the video sourceyou want to capture.
6. Click the Alpha button to select whether to includethe alpha with the capture (Yes) or not (No). Youmust have an input BNC selected as the capturesource to capture the alpha.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Media-Store • 53
7. Use theCapture Number slider to select a numberfor the still you want to capture.
8. In the Name field, enter the name you want to giveto the still. This will be the file name that the still isstored on the USB as.
Note: Files names cannot contain symbols such as ! @ #& * ( ) / , ? ' " and cannot start with an underscore (_).
9. Click Capture.
Media-Store AttributesAttributes are applied to the image or animation directly,regardless of the channels that the image or animationare loaded in. If you adjust the attributes of the still inone channel, these settings are applied to that image oranimation in all other channels that the same image oranimation is loaded into.
Tip: The attributes for a media item can be set from the controlpanel menu or from the MediaManager node in DashBoard.
Table 4: Attributes Menu Items
DescriptionMenu Item
selects the horizontal position of the image oranimation
X Position
selects the vertical position of the image oranimation
Y Position
selects shaped or unshaped for the alpha of theimage or animation
Shaped
Shows the color code that the switcher wasoperating in when the media item was added.
Gamut
selects whether the animation loops automaticallyor not
Looping
selects whether the animation plays in reverse ornot
Reverse
selects whether the animation starts playingautomatically when taken on-air or not
AutoPly
selects the speed that an animation plays at(0.1-10)
PlaySpeed
selects the media number that you want to use torecall the still or animation
Media No.
selects the point, in frames, from the start of theanimation that the background transition occurs
Cut Frame
selects the point, in frames, from the start of theanimation that is used as the thumbnail for theanimation
ThumbFrame
selects whether the associated audio is turned onor off during playback
Mute
shows the name of the media itemName
shows the width of the media item in pixelsWidth
shows the height of the media item in pixelsHeight
DescriptionMenu Item
shows whether there is an associated alpha withthe media item
Alpha
shows the number of frames in the media itemNumberFrames
shows the number of channels of audio associatedwith the media item
AudioChannels
To Set Media-Store File AttributesThe attributes that you can set depend on whether thefile you are setting them for is a still or animation.1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on the
switcher. You must wait 5 seconds for the switcherto recognise the USB drive. If you are loading a filefrom the internal cache, you do not need the USBdrive.
2. Press the source button for the Media-Store channelthat you want to load a still into. If the file has analpha, the paired channel will load the alpha as well.
3. Press NEXT.4. Use the Attrib knob to select the attribute you want
to set, and the Value knob to select the value youwant to assign to the attribute.
Note: The options that are available depend on whetherthe media item is an animation or still, and whether audiois associated with it.
• X Pos — selects the horizontal position of theimage or animation
• Y Pos — selects the vertical position of theimage or animation
• Shaped — selects shaped or unshaped for thealpha of the image or animation
• Looping— selects whether the animation loopsautomatically or not
• Reverse— selects whether the animation playsin reverse or not
• AutoPly— selects whether the animation startsplaying automatically when taken on-air or not
• Speed — selects the speed that an animationplays at (0.1-10)
• Media# — selects the media number that youwant to use to recall the still or animation
• CutFr — selects the point, in frames, from thestart of the animation that the backgroundtransition occurs
• Mute — selects whether the associated audio isturned on or off during playback
5. Use the Func knob to select how you want to savethe attributes.
54 • Media-Store — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
• Save — saves the adjustments for the selectedAttrib value only
• SavAll — saves the adjustments for all Attribvalues
• Revert — undoes the adjustments for theselected Attrib value only
• RevAll— undoes the adjustments for allAttribvalues
6. Press the Func knob to make the selection.
To Lock a Media Number Place and BankLocking the Media Number Place and Bank means thatyou do not have to enter them when loading a still. Locksetting are specific to the channel they are set on.1. Press the source button for the Media-Store channel
that you want to set the Place and Bank lock settingsfor.
2. Press the Browse knob.3. Press NEXT.4. Use the Place knob to select USB or Internal.5. Press the Place knob to toggle the lock on or off.
Locked is shown with [] around the name.6. Use the Media knob to select the bank you want to
lock to.7. Press the Media knob to toggle the lock on or off.
Locked is shown with [] around the name.
MediaManagerThe MediaManager provides a graphical interface to theoperation of the Media-Store. The layout of theMediaManager window is stored in Perspectives. Thelast loaded Perspective is used when the browser isrefreshed or opened.From the Menu Bar at the top of the window you canmanage Perspectives.
Tip: You can either launch the MediaManager directly using theswitcher IP address, or you can access it using theMediaManager node in DashBoard. If you are logging intoMediaManager from DashBoard, you must have Microsoft®Internet Explorer® 10, or higher, installed.
Using MediaManagerTo use the MediaManager, you must have a computerconnected to the same subnet as the switcher, the IPaddress of your switcher, and the Google Chrome™
browser installed on your computer. In the web browser,navigate to the IP address of the switcher, theMediaManager is displayed.When you are communicating with the switcher, amoving status indicator is shown in the lower right corner
of the browser window. If you lose communications withthe switcher, refresh the browser window to reconnect.Refreshing the browser will reset your Perspectives.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when logging in and usingthe MediaManager:• Ross Video recommends using Google Chrome™
v14.0 running on Microsoft® Windows® 7 orMacintosh® OS X® Lion to connect to theMediaManager.
• Your browser must have Oracle® JavaScript® andcookies enabled.
• Ross Video recommends that you do not connectmore than 5 MediaManager clients to a singleswitcher at the same time.
The MediaManager WindowThe MediaManager window provides a graphicalinterface to the Media-Store. From this window, you canload stills or animations from the internal cache or USBinto a Media-Store channel or edit the on-air properties.Media-Store channels have a red background when on-airand green when going on-air with the next transition.
Figure 16: MediaManager Window
Tip: The film-strip symbol ( ) on a thumbnail indicates thatthe media item is an animation, the key symbol ( ) indicatesthat the still or animation has an alpha, and the speaker symbol
( ) indicates that the media item has audio associated with it.
Stills and animations can be loaded into a channel byeither selecting the channel and double-clicking on thefile, or by dragging a file and dropping it onto thechannel. When a channel or file is selected, the propertiesfor the animation or still can be viewed in the ITEMDETAILS area.
Note: If the files on your USB are new, it takes about 2 secondsper file for the switcher to generate the thumbnail for theMediaManager. Once all the thumbnails are generated, they aredisplayed in the MediaManager window.
Note: Media items must be created in the same color gamutand dynamic range that they are intended to be used in on theswitcher. If a media item is created in one color space and the
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Media-Store • 55
switcher is operating in another, the media item may not appearcorrectly.
Animation ControlsThe MediaManager interface allows you to manuallycontrol the play-out of an animation.
Figure 17: Media-Store Channel — Animation ControlsTable 5: Animation Controls
DescriptionNameIcon
Play the animation loaded inthe Media-Store channel.
Play
Turns Looping of theanimation on or off.
Looping
Toggle the direction that theanimation is played in.
Reverse
Loads the animation again.Recue
Eject the current still oranimation from theMedia-Storechannel. This is the same asloading media number 000 onthe panel.
Eject
PlaylistsPlaylists allow you to create a rundown of stills oranimations that you want to load into a Media-Storechannel. Using the left and right arrows, you can advanceto the next or previous still or animation in the playlist.
Note: Items on the playlist are not pre-cached. As you advanceto the next item in the list, the switcher must load that still oranimation. Depending on what you are loading, and if the itemhas been loaded before, this could take a few seconds.
Figure 18: Playlist
Table 6: Playlist Controls
DescriptionNameIcon
Advance to the previous itemin the playlist. The item in theplaylist that is being shown onthe Media-Store channelindicated with a check-mark.The playlist does not loop backto the top when it reaches thelast item.
Previous
Advance to the next item in theplaylist.
Next
Move the currently selecteditem up in the playlist.
Up and Down
Move the currently selecteditem down in the playlist.
Up and Down
Delete the selected item fromthe playlist. This does notdelete the item, or clear theMedia-Store channel.
Delete
Clears the current playlist.New Playlist
Allows you to load, save, ordelete a playlist on theswitcher. If you delete a playlistthat was loaded into aMedia-Store channel, it doesnot clear that channel.
Load or SavePlaylist
Expand or Collapse the playlistarea for the Media-Storechannel.
Expand orCollapse
56 • Media-Store — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Clip PlayerThe clip player offers a single playout channel forcompressed MPEG-4 AVC (ITU-T H.264) that can beassigned as a source on any bus in the switcher. Basictransport controls can be performed manually from theClip Player page, using custom controls, or throughAMP commands.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with the clipplayer:• Media items must be created in the same color gamut
and dynamic range that they are intended to be usedin on the switcher. If a media item is created in onecolor space and the switcher is operating in another,the media item may not appear correctly.
• The clip player is only available in SD/HD videoformats.
• Do not copy a clip to the USB while a clip is playing.Copying a clip to the USB while the Clip Player isplaying a clip can cause the clip to stutter or stop.
Clip SpecificationsThe clip player supports clips in the ITU-T H.264(MPEG-4 AVC) codec in specific HD video formats.
Codecs• ITU-T H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC)
• Profile— Baseline, Constrained Baseline, Main,or High
• Version — 4.1 or lower
Clip and Video FormatsOnly clip formats for 1280×720 are supported by the clipplayer. The clip frame rates that are supported by the clipplayer depend on the video format that the switcher isoperating in.
Note: Other clip and video format combinations may work insome applications, but playout quality cannot be guaranteed.
Note: Due to performance restrictions, clip playback is notrecommended when the switcher is operating in 1080p 59.94Hz.
Note: The clip player does not support playing clips when theswitcher is operating in a pSF video format.
Table 7: Supported Switcher Video Formats and ClipResolution and Frame Rates
1280×72059.94FPS
1280×72050FPS
1280×72029.97FPS
1280×72025FPS
Vid Format
1080p59.94Hz
YY1080p50Hz
Y1080p29.97Hz
YY1080p25Hz
1080pSF29.97Hz
1080pSF25Hz
Y1080i59.94Hz
Y1080i 50Hz
Y720p59.94Hz
Y720p 50Hz
Clip NamesThe name can contain letters, numbers, spaces, dashes,underscores, and, periods, but should not containsymbols.
Tip: A maximum of 255 clip names can be displayed.
AudioThe clip player supports playout of the first two channelsof embedded audio on either of the AES. Audio cannotbe embedded in the video playout and must be 24-bit at48kHz.The clip player audio must be assigned to the AES portfor audio playout.
Clip Player InterfaceThe clip player interface (Click Navigation Menu >Live Assist > Clip Player) provides basic transportcontrols and clip management.
Tip: Click Reset Clip Player to reset the clip player if it is in anon-responsive state.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Clip Player • 57
Transport Controls1. Step Back — Step backwards by 1/10 second.2. Play/Pause — Play the current clip forward at
1-times normal speed.3. Step Forward — Step forward by 1/10 second.4. Re-cue — Re-cue the current clip to the first frame.5. Eject — Eject the current clip from the clip player
channel. The thumbnail preview shows no clipselected and the output is black.
6. Loop — Toggle loop mode on where the clip startsplaying again from the start after it reaches the end.
The progress bar below the transport control buttonsshows the progress of the playout of the clip. The numberat the left of the progress bar is clip timecode, and thenumber at the right is the time remaining. You can clickon any point on the progress bar to jump to that point inthe clip.
Tip: Click Capture Thumbnail to use the current frame of theclip as the thumbnail for the clip in the clip player.
Clip ControlBelow the transport controls are a number of buttons formanaging clip lists and setting the pre-roll time.• Refresh Clip List — Refreshes the list of clips
found on the USB. If you add a clip directly to theUSB via FTP, you must refresh the list for the newclip(s) to appear in the list.
• Capture Thumbnail— Captures the current frameof the clip for use as a thumbnail of the clip. You canuse the progress bar to jump to the frame you wantto use.
• Clip Details — Displays a popup with details onthe video and audio properties of the clip that iscurrently loaded.
• AMP PreRoll — Enter the pre-delay (pre-roll)interval (in frames) that the switcher waits after theclip player starts playing and before taking the inputsource on-air. Depending on the clip you are playing,you may have to increase this value to ensure that
your clip is playing just as it is transitioned on-air.This value is used with the Roll Clip transitionfunctionality.
Panel ControlWhen you select the clip player on a bus on the controlpanel, the menu follows and allows you to select and cuea clip.1. Use the Clips knob to select the clip you want to
load into the clip player.
Tip: Press the Clips knob to refresh the clip list and jumpto the first clip in the list. This is useful when you add ordelete a clip from the directory.
2. Press the Cue knob to cue the selected clip.3. Press the Play knob to play the cued clip.
Custom ControlThe Video Server custom controls can be used to controlthe clip player. When you are creating the custom control,select the ClipPlyr video server as the target device.
To Load a ClipClips located in the video folder on the USB can beloaded into the clip player. Sub-folders are not supportedat this time.
Clips must be located on the USB in the/clips/video folder. The switcher will create thisfolder if it does not already exist.
Important: Do not copy a clip to the USB while a clipis playing. Copying a clip to the USB while the ClipPlayer is playing a clip can cause the clip to stutteror stop.
Note: The clip player is only available in SD/HD video formats.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > ClipPlayer.
2. Click on the clip you want to load.
Note: The clips is loaded into the channel as soon as youclick on it. If a clip is already playing it is ejected and thenew clips is loaded.
Tip: If the clip you want to load does not appear in the list,click Refresh Clip List. The switcher re-scans the USBfolder and updates the clip list.
Tip: You can use FTP to copy a clip to USB while it is stillin the switcher. Refer to To Create an FTP Connection onpage 108 for information on creating an FTP connection tothe USB.
The clip is loaded and queued into the clip player.
58 • Clip Player — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
3. ClickClip Details to view general, video, and audioinformation on the currently loaded clip.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Clip Player • 59
Custom ControlsOnce programmed, a custom control (CC) can be playedback by pressing a button. The custom control can be assimple as triggering an output GPI pulse, or as complexas recalling a specific memory register on an ME,performing a switcher transition, and selecting a groupof keys.You can record, edit, and run custom controls from theCustom Control node in DashBoard.
Custom Control SetupThe custom control interface on your switcher can becustomized to show custom control names on themnemonics just below the Custom Control bus, orautomatically add delays between each custom controlevent as you are recording a custom.
To Set Custom Control OptionsSet how the custom control names appear on mnemonicsand whether pauses are added automatically.1. Press BANK 1 > EDIT > NEXT. It does not matter
which bank you select, the settings apply to allcustom controls.
2. Use the Row knob to select the control panel rowthat you want to set how the custom control namesappear on the mnemonics.
3. Use the CCMem knob to set how custom controlnames are shown on the mnemonics.• Off — only video source names are shown• Split — mnemonics are split with custom
control names on the top and source names onthe bottom
• Full — only custom control names are shown
4. If you selectedSplit, use theMColor knob to selectwhether the mnemonics use the bus map color (Xpt)or the custom control color (CC).
5. Press NEXT.6. Use the CCPaus knob to set whether pauses are
added automatically after each event.• Manual — pauses are not added automatically• Record — each command is automatically
separated from the previous command by a pauseequal to the real-time delay between the userentering commands
Recording Custom ControlsWhen you create a custom control, you record a seriesof button presses on the panel, as well as special
functions, that are played back when you run the customcontrol.Almost any action or setting can be stored in a customcontrol, with the following exceptions:• Diagnostic Functions• Confirmation Dialogs• Panel-Specific Functions
Note: It is recommended that you use a control panel forrecording custom controls.
To Record a Custom ControlA basic custom control records a series of button presseson the control panel.
Tip: If the CCPaus feature is set to Record, pauses willautomatically be added between button pressed. If it is set toManual you will have go back and edit the custom control to addthe pauses.
1. Press MENU > BANK 1 > START/STOP.2. Use the Bank knob to select the bank that the
custom control you want to record will be stored on.3. Use the CC knob to select the custom control that
you want to record to, or select the custom controlon the bus directly. If the custom control already hasa macro recorded, an * is shown next to the number.
4. Press Record Start to start recording.5. Insert the events you want to record. These can
include source selections, key types, transitions, andmenu selection, for example. Special functions canalso be inserted.Each custom control can have a maximum of 998events, plus the End event.
6. Press Record Stop to finish recording.
Tip: Press CANCEL if you do not want to store yourchanges to the custom control.
Special FunctionsSpecial functions allow you to include events notassociated with a button press into a custom control. Aspecial function can be inserted into any existing customcontrol, or used when creating a new custom control.
Table 8: Special Functions
DefinitionFunction
Allows you to place a command in acustom control that will stop the customcontrol at the hold event. You must pressthe custom control button again, or use aGPI trigger, to continue the customcontrol.
Hold
60 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DefinitionFunction
Allows you to place a command in acustom control that will stop a customcontrol at the pause event. The length ofthe pause is set when the pause isinserted. When holding the INSERTbutton, pauses are shown as Px, wherex is the length of the pause in frames.
Pause
Allows you to have a custom control runcontinuously until stopped, or aCancel/Cancel All custom controlcommand is executed from anothercustom control.
Loop
Allows you to trigger a pre-selected GPIoutput using a custom control. Thespecific GPI output is set when the GPOcommand is inserted.
GPO
Allows you create a custom control thatwill cut keys on or off. The specific keyand whether the key is cut on or off is setwhen the key cut command is inserted.
CutKey
Allows you to create a custom control thatwill transition keys on or off. The specifickey and whether the key is transitionedon or off is set when the key transitioncommand is inserted.
TrnKey
Allows you to create a custom control thatwill include a key with the next transitionto take the key on-air, or off-air. Thespecific key and whether it should goon-air, or off-air is set when the includekey command is inserted.
IncKey
Allows you to resume a particular customcontrol that is at a hold. The specificcustom control is set when the resume isinserted. If the target custom control is notat a hold event, the resume command willnot start the target custom control.
Resume
Allows you to stop a particular customcontrol. The specific custom control is setwhen the cancel is inserted.
Cancel
Allows you to stop all running customcontrols.
CancelAll
Allows you to embed the entire state ofthe switcher into a custom control. A statein a custom control behaves just like amemory.
State
To Insert a Special Event into a CustomControlA special function can be inserted into any existingcustom control, or used when creating a new customcontrol.1. Start recording or editing your custom control where
you want to insert the special event.2. Press INSERT.
3. Use the INSERT knob to select the event you wantto insert.You can also press and hold the INSERT button andpress the source button on the custom control busfor the event you want to insert. The event namesare shown on the mnemonics.• Hold — press the Insert knob to insert a hold
event• Pause — use the Secs and Frames knobs to
enter the length of the pause event• Loop — press the Loop knob to loop the
custom control back to the beginning• GPO — use the Pin knob to select the GPI
output• CutKey — use the Key knob to select the key,
and the State knob to select whether you wantthe key cut on or off
• TrnKey — use the Key knob to select the key,and the State knob to select whether you wantthe key transitioned on or off
• IncKey — use the Key knob to select the key,and the State knob to select whether the keyshould be transitioned on-air or off-air with thenext transition
• Resume — use the Bank knob to select thecustom control bank, and the CC knob to selectwhich custom control to resume
• Cancel — use the Bank knob to select thecustom control bank, and the CC knob to selectwhich custom control to cancel
• CancelAll — press the CancelAll knob toinsert a cancel all custom controls command
• State— press the Insert knob to insert the state
4. Press the Insert knob to insert the event.5. Press START/STOP.
Running a Custom ControlOnce a custom control has been programmed, you canrun that custom control by pressing the button that thecustom control was recorded to.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when running customcontrols:• A custom control will continue to run until it reaches
a hold event, is stopped by another custom control,you edit a custom control, or the custom controlreaches the end.
• When a custom control is running, the button on thecustom control bus is red.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 61
• When a custom control is held (at a Hold event), thebutton on the custom control bus flashes white.
• You can run multiple custom controls at the sametime. The number of running custom controls isshown on the display when in custom control mode.
• You can stop a running custom control by pressingthe red custom control button on the custom controlbank.
• You can stop all running custom controls by selectinga custom control with no events recorded to it.
• A maximum of 128 custom controls can be run at thesame time.
To Run a Custom ControlOnce a custom control has been recorded, you can runthat custom control at any time.1. Press MENU.2. Select the bank that the custom control you want to
run is on by pressing the bank button.3. Select the custom control you want to run by
pressing the source button on the custom controlbus.The custom control starts to play immediately.
Editing a Custom ControlAfter you have recorded a custom control, you can goback and edit that custom control to add or removeevents.
Tip: Custom controls can also be edited from the CustomControl node in DashBoard.
To Edit a Custom ControlWhen editing a custom control, you can delete and insertevents at any point in the custom control, or appendevents to the end.
Tip: When editing a custom control, press RUN EVENT to runthe currently selected event. This can help you diagnoseproblems in a custom control.
1. Press MENU > BANK 1 > EDIT.2. Use the Bank knob to select the bank that the
custom control you want to record will be stored on,or select the bank button directly.
3. Use the CC knob to select the custom control thatyou want to edit, or select the custom control on thebus directly. The custom control will have an * nextto the number.
4. Use the Func knob to select where and how youwant to edit the custom control.• Edit — select the position in the custom control
to edit events
• Append — add events to the end of the customcontrol
5. Press the Func knob to start editing.
Tip: You can also start editing a custom control by pressingand holding EDIT and selecting the bank and custom thatyou want to edit to.
The display changes to show the name and durationof the custom control, and the currently selectedevent in the custom control.
6. Delete an event in a custom control as follows:a) Use the left knob to select the event you want
to delete. You can also use the PREV andNEXT buttons.
b) Press DELETE.
7. Insert an event into a custom control as follows:a) Use the left knob to select the event you want
to insert an event before. You can also use thePREV and NEXT buttons.
b) Press INSERT.c) Insert the events you want.d) Press START/STOP to finish recording.
To Edit a CC From DashBoardWhen editing a custom control, you can delete and insertevents at any point in the custom control, or appendevents to the end.
Tip: When editing a custom control, press Run Event to runthe currently selected event. This can help you diagnoseproblems in a custom control.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control >Editor.
2. Click Bank X to select the bank that the customcontrol you want to edit is on.
3. Click the custom control that you want to edit.4. Click the event that you want to edit or insert an
event before.Refer to Custom Control Events on page 63 forinformation on available events.
5. Edit the custom control or event.• Append (Record) — start inserting events to
the end of the custom control• Append — insert the current event at the end
of the custom control• Copy — copy the entire custom control• Delete — delete the entire custom control• Delete Event — delete the currently selected
event
62 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
• Edit Event — edit the parameters of thecurrently selected event
• Insert (Record) — start insert events after thecurrently selected event
• Insert — insert the current event after thecurrently selected event
• Record— start recording a new custom controlover the existing one
• Run Event — run the currently selected event
Custom Control EventsThe Custom Control editor in DashBoard allows you toadd or edit events in custom controls.
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select how the switcher willstrip or pass ancillary data.1. Click a Value button to
select how the switchertreats ancillary data.
SwitcherInstallation> AncillaryMode
Ancillary DataMode
Set the pan level for theselected channel on theselected device.1. Click Audio Pan.2. Click the Audio Mixer
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click the Channel buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the new pan level inthe Pan Left/Right (%)field.
Devices >AudioMixer
Audio MixerPan
DescriptionLocationEvent
Set the level for the selectedchannel on the selected device.1. Click Audio Volume.2. Click the Audio Mixer
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click the Channel buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the new audio levelin the Volume (%) field.
Devices >AudioMixer
Audio MixerVolume
Performs an auto transition onthe selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Auto Trans.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
Auto Trans
Select a source on the selectedbus for the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to select a bus on.
2. Click the Bus/Keyerbutton and select the busthat you want to select asource on.
3. If you selected a key bus,click a Bus button toselect whether you areselecting a source for thefill (Video) or the alpha(Alpha) of the key.
4. Click the Source buttonand select the source thatyou want on the selectedbus.
Switcher >Bus SourceSelect
Bus SourceSelect
Cancel all running customcontrols.
Special >Cancel All
Cancel All CC
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 63
DescriptionLocationEvent
Cancel a running customcontrol.1. Click theBank button and
select the custom controlbank you want to cancela custom control on.
2. Click the CC button andselect the custom controlyou want to cancel.
Special >Cancel CC
Cancel CC
Initialize a chroma key for theselected key for the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
Switcher >Keyer >ChromaKeyer Init
Chroma Key,Initialize
Select the color you want tokey out for the selected key forthe selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. ClickColor and select thecolor you want to key out.
Switcher >Keyer >ChromaKeyer Color
Chroma KeyColor
Select the mode for a chromakey for the selected key for theselected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click a Mode button toselect whether you wantthe chroma key to operatein basic mode (Basic), oradvanced (Advanced).
Switcher >Keyer >ChromaKeyer Mode
Chroma KeyMode
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the various advancedchroma key settings for theselected key for the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select theparameter you want toadjust.
4. Click the Value buttonand select the new valueyou want to enter for theselected parameter.
Switcher >Keyer >ChromaKeyerParam
Chroma KeySetup
Select the clean feed locationfor the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click a Before Keyerbutton to select whetheryou want the clean feedoutput to be taken beforekey 1 (Keyer 1), key 2(Keyer 2), or key 3(Keyer 3).
SwitcherInstallation> ME > MEClean Feed
Clean Feed
Reset the values for theselected color corrector colorchannel(s).1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to reset.
2. Click the Color buttonand select the individualcolor component (Red,Green, Blue) you want toadjust, or RGB for all ofthem.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorR/G/BReset
Color CorrectorColor Reset
64 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Enable a Color Corrector for avideo input or output.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thatyou want assign a ColorCorrector to.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click a Value button toselect whether to enablethe color corrector (On) ordisable the color corrector(Off).
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorEnable
Color CorrectorEnable
Adjust the Gain for the selectedcolor corrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Color buttonand select the individualcolor component (Red,Green, Blue) you want toadjust, or RGB for all ofthem.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Gain.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorParam
Color CorrectorGain Param
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the Gamma Offset forthe selected color corrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Color buttonand select the individualcolor component (Red,Green, Blue) you want toadjust, or RGB for all ofthem.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectGammaOffset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorParam
Color CorrectorGamma OffsetParam
Adjust the Offset for theselected color corrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Color buttonand select the individualcolor component (Red,Green, Blue) you want toadjust, or RGB for all ofthem.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectGammaValue.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorParam
Color CorrectorGamma Param
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 65
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the Lower Offset for theselected color corrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Color buttonand select the individualcolor component (Red,Green, Blue) you want toadjust, or RGB for all ofthem.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select LowerOffset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorParam
Color CorrectorLower OffsetParam
Adjust the Offset for theselected color corrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Color buttonand select the individualcolor component (Red,Green, Blue) you want toadjust, or RGB for all ofthem.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Offset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorParam
Color CorrectorOffset Param
DescriptionLocationEvent
Reset the values for theselected color corrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the color correctorassigned to it that youwant to reset.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ColorCorrectorReset
Color CorrectorReset
Performs a cut on the selectedME.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Cut.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
Cut
Select the aspect ratio for theDVE key on the selected keyfor the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectAspect.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter an aspect ratio inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE KeyAspect
66 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the custom color youwant to apply to the border ofthe DVE key of the selectedarea. Each component of theHSL color must be insertedindividually.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Componentbutton and select the HSLcomponent you want toassign a value to. A valueshould be applied to allthree components.
5. Enter a value for theselected component in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE BorderColor (HSL)
DVE KeyBorder Color(HSL)
Select the preset color youwant to apply to the border ofthe DVE key of the selectedkey for the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Color buttonand select the presetcolor you want to apply tothe border.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE BorderColor(Preset)
DVE KeyBorder Color(Preset)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the size of border for theDVE key on the selected keyfor the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectBorder.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a size for the borderin the Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE KeyBorder
Select the amount of croppingon the bottom edge of the DVEkey on the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectBottomEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the amount ofcropping in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE Key Crop(Bottom Edge)
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 67
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the amount of croppingon both horizontal or verticaledges of the DVE key of theselected key for the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Parameterbutton and select theedges you want to crop.
5. Enter the amount of Leftor Top cropping you wantto apply in the Value %field.
6. Enter the amount of Rightor Bottom cropping youwant to apply in theOtherValue % field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE CropParam
DVE Key Crop(Dual Edge)
Select the amount of croppingon the left edge of the DVE keyon the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select LeftEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the amount ofcropping in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE Key Crop(Left Edge)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the amount of croppingon the right edge of the DVEkey on the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select RightEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the amount ofcropping in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE Key Crop(Right Edge)
Select the amount of croppingon the top edge of the DVE keyon the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select TopEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the amount ofcropping in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE Key Crop(Top Edge)
68 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the amount of softnessto apply to the edge of the DVEkey on the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectSoftness.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter an amount ofsoftness for the DVE keyor border in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE Key EdgeSoftness
Select the size of the DVE keyon the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Size.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new size in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE Key Size
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the x-axis position of theDVE key on the selected keyfor the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select X-Pos.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE KeyX-Position
Select the y-axis position forthe DVE key on the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Y-Pos.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >DVE Param
DVE KeyY-Position
Reset the parameters ordirection and flip-flop for theDVE wipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click Reset to reset theDVE wipe parameters.
Switcher >Transition >DVE WipeReset
DVE Wipe,Reset
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 69
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whether the DVE wipereverses direction for everysecond transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click Flip-Flip.4. Click On or Off to select
whether Flip-Flop is on(On) or not (Off).
Switcher >Transition >DVE WipeDirection
DVE WipeDirection(Flip-Flop)
Select the direction for the DVEwipe transition of the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click Direction.4. Click Forward or
Reverse to selectwhether the DVE wipemoves in a forward(Forward) or reverse(Reverse) direction.
Switcher >Transition >DVE WipeDirection
DVE WipeDirection
Select the pattern you want touse for a DVE wipe transitionof the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Effect buttonand select the pattern youwant to use for the DVEwipe.
Switcher >Transition >DVE WipeEffect
DVE WipePattern
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whetherEmbeddedTriggers is enabledor not for the selected output.1. Click the Output button
and select the output BNCthat you want to sendEmbeddedTriggerscommands on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click a Value button toselect whetherEmbeddedTriggerscommands are insertedfor the selected output(On) or not (Off).
SwitcherInstallation>EmbeddedTrigger >Enable
EmbeddedTriggers— Enable
Select the custom control toinsert into theEmbeddedTriggers message.1. Enter the custom control
bank in the Bank field.2. Enter the custom control
in the CC field.
SwitcherInstallation>EmbeddedTrigger >Trigger CC
EmbeddedTriggers— InsertTrigger
Select the data identifier word(DID) you want to use for theEmbeddedTriggers message.1. Click DID2. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the DID value youwant to use in the Valuefield.
SwitcherInstallation>EmbeddedTrigger >Settings
EmbeddedTriggers— Set DID
Select the line in the VANC thatthe EmbeddedTriggersmessage will be inserted on.1. Click Line2. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the line value youwant to use in the Valuefield.
SwitcherInstallation>EmbeddedTrigger >Settings
EmbeddedTriggers— Set Line
70 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the remote ID you wantto use to identify the switcherthat the EmbeddedTriggersmessage is coming from.1. Click Remote ID2. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the remote ID valueyou want to use in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation>EmbeddedTrigger >Settings
EmbeddedTriggers— Set RemoteID
Select the secondary dataidentifier word (SDID) you wantto use for theEmbeddedTriggers message.1. Click SDID2. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the SDID value youwant to use in the Valuefield.
SwitcherInstallation>EmbeddedTrigger >Settings
EmbeddedTriggers— Set SDID
Assign DVE resources (Fly) tothe selected key for theselected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether DVEresources are assigned tothe key (On) or not (Off).
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Fly
Fly Key (DVE)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Set up the type of edge triggerfor the GPI output.1. Click GPO Edge
Duration2. Click theGPO button and
select the GPI output thatyou want to configure.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the duration of theedge trigger in theDuration (fr) field.
Devices >GPO
GPI Output —Edge TriggerSetup
Set up the type of level triggerfor the GPI output.1. Click GPO Level Config2. Click theGPO button and
select the GPI output thatyou want to configure.
3. Click a Level to selectwhether the level triggeruses a high (High) or low(Low) level trigger.
Devices >GPO
GPI Output —Level TriggerSetup
Select whether the level triggerGPI output act as a tally.1. Click GPO Mode2. Click theGPO button and
select the GPI output thatyou want to configure.
3. Click a Mode button toselect whether the leveltrigger GPI output, whenassigned to video source,acts as a roll clip(Normal) or as a tally(Tally) for the selectedsource.
Devices >GPO
GPI Output —Mode
Trigger a GPI output.1. Click GPO Trigger2. Click theGPO button and
select the GPI output thatyou want to trigger.
Devices >GPO
GPI Output —Trigger
Select the type of trigger for theGPI output.1. Click GPO Trigger
Configuration2. Click theGPO button and
select the GPI output thatyou want to configure.
3. Click a Trigger to selectwhether the GPI outputuses a level (Level) oredge (Edge) trigger.
Devices >GPO
GPI Output —Trigger Type
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 71
DescriptionLocationEvent
Insert a hold into the customcontrol.
Special >Hold
Hold CC
Assign an I/O Processor to avideo input or output.1. Click the IO Processor
button and select the I/OProcessor that you wantto assign to an input oroutput.
2. Click the Assignmentbutton and select theinput or output that youwant to assign the I/OProcessor to. Select Offto have the I/O Processornot assigned to a source.
SwitcherInstallation> I/OProcessingAssignment
I/O ProcessorAssignment
Assign an FSFC to an input.1. Click the Input button and
select the input BNC thatyou want to assign anFSFC to.
2. Click a ValueType buttonto assign an FSFC to theinput (SDI-FS) or not havean FSFC assigned to theinput (SDI).
SwitcherInstallation> Input >Input Type
Input FSFCAssignment
Select the video framing that isapplied to the converted videoinput.1. Click the Input button and
select the input BNC thatyou want to assign theframing to.
2. Click a Type button toassign an FSFC to theinput (SDI-FS/QuadFS)or not have an FSFCassigned to the input(SDI).
3. Click a Value button toassign the type of framingto the input.
SwitcherInstallation> Input >InputFraming
Input FSFCFraming
Make the selected key linearon the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want to makelinear.
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer MakeLinear
Key, MakeLinear
DescriptionLocationEvent
Transition a key (or include itin the next transition) on oroff-air for the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Parameterbutton and select a cut(Cut Key) or autotransition (Trans Key) forthe key, or have to keyincluded in the nexttransition (Include Key).
5. Click the Value button toselect whether the key istransitioned on-air /included in the nexttransition to go on-air(On) or off-air / includedin the next transition to gooff-air (Off).
Switcher >Keyer >KeyerActive
Key Active
Copy the contents of one keyto another key the same or adifferent area.1. Click the Target ME
button and select whereyou want to copy the keyto.
2. Click the Target Keyerbutton for the key youwant to copy to.
3. Click the Source MEbutton and select whereyou want to copy the keyfrom.
4. Click the Source Keyerbutton for the key youwant to copy from.
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Copy
Key Copy
72 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Turn the key invert feature onor off for the selected key forthe selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toreverse the polarity of thekey alpha so that theholes in the backgroundare cut by dark areas ofthe key alpha instead ofbright areas.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Value button toturn key invert on (On) oroff (Off).
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Invert
Key Invert
Select the mode for theselected key for the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click a Mode button tohave the key set asshaped/unshaped fromthe key (Normal), asadditive for a shapedsource (Additive), oralpha to fullyopaque/white (Full).
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Mode
Key Mode
Perform a key only transitionfor the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Action buttonand select whether theykey should perform a cut(Cut), or auto transition(Auto Trans).
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Trans
Key OnlyTransition
DescriptionLocationEvent
Reset the parameters for theselected key for the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want to resetthe clip, gain,transparency, invert, andmask for.
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer ResetParams
Key Reset
Select clip, gain, andtransparency settings for theselected key for the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a value for the clip,gain, or transparency forthe key in the Value field.
Switcher >Keyer >KeyerSettings
Key Settings(Clip, Gain,Transparency)
Swap the contents of one keywith another key the same ora different area.1. Click the 1st ME button
and select where the firstkey you want to swap is.
2. Click the 1st Keyer buttonfor the first key you wantto swap.
3. Click the 2nd ME buttonand select where thesecond key you want toswap is.
4. Click the 2nd Keyerbutton for the second keyyou want to swap.
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Swap
Key Swap
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 73
DescriptionLocationEvent
Set or reset the keyer transitionrate of the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new transitionrate, in frames, for the keyin the Value (fr) field.
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer TransRate
Key Trans Rate
Assign a key type for a key forthe selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click a Type button toassign the key type to theselected key.
Switcher >Keyer >Keyer Type
Key Type
Select whether external layermode is active for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click a Value button toselect whether externallayer mode is on (On) ornot (Off).
SwitcherInstallation> ME > MELayer Mode
Layer Mode
Insert a loop into the customcontrol.
Special >Loop
Loop CC
DescriptionLocationEvent
Apply a mask to the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether toforce the area inside themask region to theforeground (On) or not(Off).
Switcher >Keyer >Mask Force
Mask, Force
Invert the mask of the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether toinvert the masked areawith the unmasked area(On) or not (Off).
Switcher >Keyer >Mask Invert
Mask, Invert
74 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Reset the mask of the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Action buttonand select the parameteryou want to reset.• Reset Type— turn
mask off.• Reset Forced— turn
force off.• Reset Inverted—
turn invert off.• Reset X-Pos—reset
horizontal position.• Reset Y-Pos—reset
vertical position.• Reset Size— reset
size.• Reset Ver Edges—
reset top and bottomedges.
• Reset Hor Edges—reset left and rightedges.
• Reset Softness—reset softness.
Switcher >Keyer >Mask Reset
Mask, Reset
Select the position for thebottom edge of the box maskon the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectBottomEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Bottom EdgePosition
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the amount of softnessto apply to the edges of the boxmask on the selected key forthe selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select EdgeSoftness.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new softnessamount in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Edge Softness
Select the position for the leftedge of the box mask on theselected key for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select LeftEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Left EdgePosition
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 75
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the position for the rightedge of the box mask on theselected key for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select RightEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Right EdgePosition
Select the size of the box maskon the selected key for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Size.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new size in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Size
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the position for the topedge of the box mask on theselected key for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select TopEdge.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Top EdgePosition
Select the x-axis position of thebox mask on the selected keyfor the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select X-Pos.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —X-Position
76 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the y-axis position forthe box mask on the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Y-Pos.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >BoxMaskParam
Mask (Box) —Y-Position
Select the aspect ratio for thepattern mask for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectAspect.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter an aspect ratio inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)—Aspect Ratio
Select the size of border for thepattern mask on the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select BorderSize.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a size for the borderin the Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— Border Size
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the amount of softnessto apply to the edge of themask for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectSoftness.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter an amount ofsoftness for the pattern orborder in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— EdgeSoftness
Select the number of times youwant to multiply the patternmask horizontally for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectHorizontal Mult.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the number of timesthe pattern is multiplied inthe Value field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— HorizontalMultiplication
Select a pattern for the patternmask for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Pattern andselect the pattern youwant to use for the patterngenerator.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMask Effect
Mask (Pattern)— Pattern
Reset the mask for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click Reset Params.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMask Reset
Mask (Pattern)— Reset
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 77
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the rotation for thepattern mask for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectRotation.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a rotation in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— Rotation
Select the size of the patternmask for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select Size.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new size in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— Size
Select the number of times youwant to multiply the patternmask vertically for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select VerticalMult.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the number of timesthe pattern is multiplied inthe Value field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— VerticalMultiplication
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the x-axis position of thepattern mask for the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select X-Pos.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— X-Position
Select the y-axis position forthe pattern mask for theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select Y-Pos.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Keyer >PatternMaskParam
Mask (Pattern)— Y-Position
Apply a mask to the selectedkey for the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theKeyer button forthe key you want toperform the event on.
3. Click aMask Type buttonto apply a pattern mask(Pattern), box mask(Box, or turn the mask off(Off).
Switcher >Keyer >Mask Type
Mask
Reset the matte color for theselected ME or aux.1. Click theME/Matte button
for the ME or aux that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. For an ME, click theMatte button and selectMatte.
Switcher >Matte >Matte ColorReset
Matte Color,Reset
78 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the custom matte colorfor the selected ME or aux.Each component of the HSLcolor must be insertedindividually.1. Click theME/Matte button
for the ME or aux that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Matte buttonand select Matte.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Componentbutton and select the HSLcomponent you want toassign a value to. A valueshould be applied to allthree components.
5. Enter a value for theselected component in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Matte >Matte Color(HSL)
Matte Color(HSL)
Select a preset matte color forthe selected ME or aux.1. Click theME/Matte button
for the ME or aux that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Matte buttonand select Matte.
3. Click the Color buttonand select the color youwant to use.
Switcher >Matte >Matte Color(Preset)
Matte Color(Preset)
Copy the contents of one areato another.1. Click the Target ME
button and select thelocation that you want tocopy to.
2. Click the Source MEbutton and select thelocation that you want tocopy from.
Switcher >ME Copy
ME Copy
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whether an animationplays automatically when takenon-air for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select AutoPlay.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether theanimation playsautomatically (On) or not(Off).
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Auto Play
Select whether to include thealpha with a capture on theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Capture Alphabutton and select whetherthe alpha is captured withthe source (Yes) or not(No).
Switcher >MediaStore> CaptureAlpha
Media-Store —Capture Alpha
Select the alpha source youwant to capture for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click Source and selectthe alpha source that youwant to capture.
Switcher >MediaStore> CaptureAlphaSource
Media-Store —Capture AlphaSource
Capture a still to the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Enter the number youwant to assign to thecapture file in theCaptureFile field.
Switcher >MediaStore> Capture
Media-Store —Capture
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 79
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the capture mode for theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click a Capture Displaybutton to select whetherthe capture is inelectronic-to-electronic"E/E" (End to End) orplayback "P/B"(Playback) mode.
Switcher >MediaStore> CaptureDisplay
Media-Store —Capture Mode
Select the video source youwant to capture for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click Source and selectthe video source that youwant to capture.
Switcher >MediaStore> MediaCaptureSource
Media-Store —Capture Source
Clear the selected Media-Storechannel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click Clear Channel.
Switcher >MediaStore> ChannelAction
Media-Store —Clear Channel
Select the point, in frames,from the start of the animationthat the MediaWipebackground cut occurs for theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select CutFrame.
4. Enter the frame in theanimation that you wantto cut to occur for theMediaWipe in the Valuefield.
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Cut Frame
DescriptionLocationEvent
Delete a captured still.1. Enter the number of the
capture file you want todelete in theCapture Filefield.
Switcher >MediaStore> DeleteMediaCapture
Media-Store —Delete Capture
Load a media item into theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Location buttonto select whether themedia item you want toload is located on theinternal storage (Internal)or on the USB (USB).
3. Enter the number of themedia item you want toload in the MediaNumber field.
Switcher >MediaStore> Load
Media-StoreLoad
Select whether an animationwill loop at the end for theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectLooping.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether theanimation loops at theend (On) or not (Off).
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Looping
80 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Move to a specific frame in themedia item for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select MoveTo Frame.
4. Enter the frame that youwant to jump to in themedia item in the Valuefield.
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Move To Frame
Select whether the associatedaudio is turned on or off duringplayback for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Mute.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether theaudio plays (On) or not(Off).
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Mute
Start an animation playing forthe selected Media-Storechannel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click Toggle Play.
Switcher >MediaStore> ChannelAction
Media-Store —Play
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the speed for ananimation to play at on theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectPlayback Speed.
4. Enter the speed, faster orslower than 100%, thatyou want the animation toplay at in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >MediaStore> PlaybackSpeed
Media-Store —Play Speed
Reset the selectedMedia-Storechannel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click Reset Media.
Switcher >MediaStore> ChannelAction
Media-Store —Reset Media
Select whether an animationplays in reverse for theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectReverse.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether theanimation plays in reverse(On) or not (Off).
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Reverse
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 81
DescriptionLocationEvent
Rewind an animation to the firstframe for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click Move to Frame 1.
Switcher >MediaStore> ChannelAction
Media-Store —Rewind
Select whether the alpha of themedia item should be shapedor ushaped for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectShaped.
4. Click the Value buttonand select whether thealpha of the media item isshaped (On) or not (Off).
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Shaped
Select the GPI output that youwant to trigger with aMediaWipe for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select GPO.
4. Enter the GPI output thatyou want to trigger withthe MediaWipe in theValue field.
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Trigger GPIOutput
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the time from the startof the MediaWipe that the GPIoutput is triggered for theselected Media-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select GPOFrame.
4. Enter the delay, in frames,for the GPI output to betriggered in the Value (fr)field.
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Trigger GPIOutput Delay
Select the x-axis position forthe media item for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select X-Pos.
4. Enter a new position inthe Value field.
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —X-Position
82 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the y-axis position forthe media item for the selectedMedia-Store channel.1. Click the MediaStore
Channel button for theMedia-Store channel youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Y-Pos.
4. Enter a new position inthe Value field.
Switcher >MediaStore> Attributes
Media-Store —Y-Position
Select which Media-Storechannel will be used for theMediaWipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click M1 or M2 to assignthat Media-Store channelto the MediaWipe.
Switcher >Transition >Media WipeChannel
MediaWipe —Channel
Sets the cut point for aMediaWipe transition for theselected area. You must selectthe point in the transition thatyou want to place the cutbefore running this event.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Set MediaCut.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
MediaWipe CutPoint, Set
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whether the MediaWipereverses direction for everysecond transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click Flip-Flip.4. Click the Value button
and select whetherFlip-Flop is on (On) or not(Off).
Switcher >Transition >Media WipeDirection
MediaWipe —Direction,Flip-Flop
Select the direction for theMediaWipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click Direction.4. Click the Value button
and select whether theMediaWipe moves in aforward (Forward) orreverse (Reverse)direction.
Switcher >Transition >Media WipeDirection
MediaWipe —Direction
Select which Media-Storechannel will be used for theMediaWipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Layer button toselect what theMediaWipe animationcovers.
Switcher >Transition >ME MediaTrans Layer
MediaWipe —Layer
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 83
DescriptionLocationEvent
Sets the ending point for aMediaWipe transition for theselected area. Use the fader tomove through the animation tothe point you want to end thetransition and run this CC tosave that point.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Set MediaTrans End.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
MediaWipeTrans EndPoint, Set
Sets the starting point for aMediaWipe transition for theselected area. Use the fader tomove through the animation tothe point you want to start thetransition and run this CC tosave that point.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Set MediaTrans Start.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
MediaWipeTrans StartPoint, Set
Sets the starting point for aMediaWipe transition for theselected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Set MediaThumb.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
MediaWipeTransThumbnail
Recall a memory for theselected area.1. Click the Include button
and select all thelocations that you want toperform thememory recallon.
2. Click theBank button andselect the bank that youwant to recall the memoryon.
3. Click the Memory buttonand select the memorythat you want to recall.
Switcher >MemoryRecall
Memory Recall
DescriptionLocationEvent
Set or reset the backgroundtransition rate of the selectedarea.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select METrans Rate.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new transitionrate, in frames, in theValue (fr) field.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransParameter
ME Trans Rate
Select the transition type for abackground transition of theselected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Type button forthe type of transition youwant to use.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransType
ME Trans Type
Select whether aspect ratiomarkers are shown for theselected box on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Value button andselect whether aspectratio markers are shown(On) or not (Off).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox AspectRatio
MultiViewerBox — AspectRatio Markers
84 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the type of border youwant to apply to the selectedbox on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click a Border Modebutton and select whetherthe border around theselected box is white(White), black (Black), orif there is no border (Off).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox BorderMode
MultiViewerBox — Border
Select whether a green(preview) tally is shown for theselected box on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Value button andselect whether a greentally is shown on theselected box (On) or not(Off).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBoxPreviewTally
MultiViewerBox — GreenTally (Preview)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whether the source labelis on or off for the selected boxon the selected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Value button andselect whether the labelon the selected box is on(On) or not (Off).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox Label
MultiViewerBox — Label
Select what source name isshown on the label for theselected box on the selectedMultiViewer. This event onlyapplies to the CarboniteeXtreme.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Label Modebutton and select whetherthe name comes from theswitcher (Switcher), therouter (Router), or bothare shown (Both).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox LabelMode
MultiViewerBox — LabelMode
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 85
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the position of thesource label for the selectedbox on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Value button andselect whether the labelon the selected box is atthe top (Top) or bottom(Bottom).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox LabelPosition
MultiViewerBox — LabelPosition
Select transparency for thebackground behind the sourcelabels on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the amount oftransparency in the Value(%) field.
MultiViewer> MV LabelTransp
MultiViewerBox — LabelTransparency
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whether a red (on-air)tally is shown for the selectedbox on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click a Value button andselect whether a red tallyis shown on the selectedbox (On) or not (Off).
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox On-AirTally
MultiViewerBox — RedTally (On-Air)
Assign a source to one of theboxes on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Box button andselect the box that youwant perform the eventon.
3. Click the Value buttonand select the source thatyou want to assign to thebox.
MultiViewer> Box > MVBox Source
MultiViewerBox — VideoSource
Select the amount of clippingto be applied to the overlaysource on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the amount ofclipping to be applied inthe Value field.
MultiViewer> MV KeyerClip
MultiViewer —Clip
86 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select a preset color for thebackground of the clock on theselected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click Background.3. Click the Color button
and select the color youwant to use.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV Clock(PresetColor)
MultiViewerClock —BackgroundColor (Preset)
Select the custom color for thelettering of the clock on theselected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Clock Areabutton and selectForeground.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Componentbutton and select the HSLcomponent you want toassign a value to. A valueshould be applied to allthree components.
5. Enter a value for theselected component in theValue (%) field.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV Clock(HSL Color)
MultiViewerClock —ForegroundColor (HSL)
Select a preset color for thelettering of the clock on theselected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click Foreground.3. Click the Color button
and select the color youwant to use.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV Clock(PresetColor)
MultiViewerClock —ForegroundColor (Preset)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the hour format for theclock on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click a Value button andselect whether the clockshows 24-hour(24-Hours), 12-hour witham/pm (12-HourAM/PM),or simple 12-hour(12-Hour) clock.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV ClockFormat
MultiViewerClock —Format
Select whether the clock showstimecode or system time on theselected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click a Clock Modebutton and select whetherthe clock shows timecode(Timecode), system time(System), or is off (Off).
MultiViewer> Clock >MV ClockMode
MultiViewerClock — Mode
Select the size of the clock onthe selected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click Clock Size.3. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the size of the clockin the Value (%) field.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV ClockParam
MultiViewerClock — Size
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 87
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select whether number offrames for a timecode areshown on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click a Value button andselect whether the framecount is shown (On) ornot (Off).
MultiViewer> Clock >MV ClockFrameCount
MultiViewerClock —TimecodeFrame Count
Select the horizontal positionof the clock on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click Clock X-Pos.3. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the horizontalposition of the clock in theValue (%) field.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV ClockParam
MultiViewerClock —X-Position
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the custom color for thebackground of the clock on theselected MultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Clock Areabutton and selectBackground.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Componentbutton and select the HSLcomponent you want toassign a value to. A valueshould be applied to allthree components.
5. Enter a value for theselected component in theValue (%) field.
MultiViewer> Clock >MV Clock(HSL Color)
MultiViewer
Select whether FSFC isshown on the label on theselected MultiViewer when asource has an FSFC applies toit.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click a Value button toselect whether FSFC isshown on the label (On)or not (Off).
MultiViewer> MV FSFCLabel
MultiViewer —FSFC Label
Select a layout for the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click the Layout buttonand select the layout youwant to use.
MultiViewer> MVLayout
MultiViewer —Layout
88 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select which outputs theMultiViewer is available on.This feature is only availablewhen the switcher is operatingin a standard-definition or 3Gvideo mode.1. Click an Outputs button
to select which pair ofoutput BNCs you want toassign to as MultiVieweroutputs.
2. Click a LockMultiViewers button toassign the selected outputBNCs as MultiVieweroutputs (On) or not (Off).
SwitcherInstallation> OutputMode
MultiViewer —Outputs
Select how the tallies areshown on the selectedMultiViewer.1. Click a MultiViewer
button to select whichMultiViewer you want thatyou want to perform theevent on.
2. Click a Tally Displaybutton to select whethertallies are shown as aborder around the box(Box), as boxes on eitherside of the label (Label),or as boxes on either sideof the label but swapped(Label Reverse).
MultiViewer> MV TallyDisplay
MultiViewer —Tally Display
Assign a source to the selectedoutput BNC.1. Click the Output button
and select the output BNCthat you want to assign asource to.
2. Click the Source buttonand select the source thatyou want to assign to theselected output BNC.
SwitcherInstallation> OutputAssignment
Output BNCAssignment
Select the video framing that isapplied to the converted videooutput.1. Click the Output button
and select the output BNCthat you want to assignthe framing to.
2. Click a Value button toassign the type of framingto the output.
SwitcherInstallation> OutputFormatConverterFramingMode
Output FSFCFraming
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select a video format for theoutput FSFC conversion.1. Click the
Output/OutputFormatConverterbutton and select theoutput BNC or output FCthat you want to select adifferent video format for.
2. Click a Video Modebutton to have the outputvideo signal converted tothe selected video formator not have an FSFCassigned to the output(None).
SwitcherInstallation> OutputFormatConverterVideoFormat
Output FSFCVideo Format
Insert a pause into the customcontrol.1. Enter the length of the
pause in the Pause (fr)field.
Special >Hold
Pause CC
Recall a register on theselected PBus device.1. Click PBus Recall
Register.2. Click thePBus button and
select the device youwant to send thecommand to.
3. Click the Device buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter number of theregister you want to recallin the Register field.
Devices >PBus
PBus — Recall
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 89
DescriptionLocationEvent
Trigger a function on theselected PBus device.1. Click PBus Trigger
Function.2. Click thePBus button and
select the device youwant to send thecommand to.
3. Click the Device buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the number of thefunction you want totrigger in the Functionfield.
Devices >PBus
PBus —Trigger
Have a key removed from theNext Transition area, so that itis not included in the nexttransition, after it has beentransitioned off-air using theKEY X CUT or KEY X AUTObuttons.1. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
2. Click the Value buttonand select whether thepersonality option is on(On) or not (Off).
SwitcherPersonality> AutoRemoveKey
Personality —Auto RemoveKey
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select how the switcher reactswhen the KEY AUTO button ispressed during a transition.1. Click the Second Auto
button and select how theswitcher reacts topressing the button duringa transition.• Ignore— the buttons
are ignored during thetransition
• Halt Forward— haltthe transition andmove forward throughthe transition whenpressed again
• Halt Reverse— haltthe transition andmove backwardsthrough the transitionwhen pressed again
• Reverse— reversethe transitionimmediately
• Cut— cut thetransition to the end
SwitcherPersonality> Key AutoTrans 2ndPress
Personality —Auto TransSecond Press(Key)
Select how the switcher reactswhen theAUTOTRANS buttonis pressed during a transition.1. Click the Second Auto
button and select how theswitcher reacts topressing the button duringa transition.• Ignore— the buttons
are ignored during thetransition
• Halt Forward— haltthe transition andmove forward throughthe transition whenpressed again
• Halt Reverse— haltthe transition andmove backwardsthrough the transitionwhen pressed again
• Reverse— reversethe transitionimmediately
• Cut— cut thetransition to the end
SwitcherPersonality> ME AutoTrans 2ndPress
Personality —Auto TransSecond Press(ME)
90 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Have the transition area resetto a default backgrounddissolve after each transition.1. Click the Change Type
button and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
2. Click the Value buttonand select whether thepersonality option is on(On) or not (Off).
SwitcherPersonality> AutoReset Trans
Personality —Next TransReset
Select whether the Roll Clipfunctionality is always on.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to adjust the roll clipfor.
2. Click aRoll Clip button toselect whether Roll Clip isalways on (Force) ormust be turned onmanually (User).
SwitcherPersonality> Roll ClipForce
Personality —Roll Clip
Play a custom control.1. Click theBank button and
select the custom controlbank you want to play acustom control on.
2. Click the CC button andselect the custom controlyou want to play.
Special >Play CC
Play CC
Reset the values for theselected proc amp or colorcorrector.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc amp or colorcorrector assigned to itthat you want to reset.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >ProcAmp/ColorCorrectorReset
ProcAmp/ColorCorrectorReset
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the black level for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select Y.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Offset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc AmpBlack LevelParam
Adjust the gain of the Cb (bluecolor difference) for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select Cb.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Gain.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc Amp CbGain Param
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 91
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the offset of the Cb (bluecolor difference) for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select Cb.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Offset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc Amp CbOffset Param
Adjust the Chrominance Gainfor the selected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select CrCb.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Gain.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc AmpChrominanceGain Param
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the gain of the Cr (redcolor difference) for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select Cr.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Gain.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc Amp CrGain Param
Adjust the offset of the Cr (redcolor difference) for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select Cr.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Offset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc Amp CrOffset Param
92 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Enable a Proc Amp for a videoinput or output.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thatyou want assign a ProcAmp to.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click a Value button toselect whether to enablethe proc amp (On) ordisable the proc amp(Off).
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpEnable
Proc AmpEnable
Adjust the Gain for the selectedproc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select YCrCb.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Gain.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc Amp GainParam
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the Gamma for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select YCrCb.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectGammaOffset.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc AmpGamma OffsetParam
Adjust the Gamma for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select YCrCb.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and selectGammaValue.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc AmpGamma Param
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 93
DescriptionLocationEvent
Adjust the Hue for the selectedproc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter a new hue rotationvalue in the Value field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpHue Rot
Proc Amp HueRotation
Adjust the Luminance Gain forthe selected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to adjust theparameter for.
2. Click the Componentbutton and select Y.
3. Click the Parameterbutton and select Gain.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter a new value in theValue field.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpParam
Proc AmpLuminanceGain Param
Reset the values for theselected proc amp.1. Click the Input/Output
button and select theinput or output BNC thathas the proc ampassigned to it that youwant to reset.
SwitcherInstallation> ProcAmp/ColorCorrector >Proc AmpReset
Proc AmpReset
Select the reference source forthe switcher.1. Click a Reference
Source button to selectwhether to use an internal(Internal) or external(External) referencesource.
SwitcherInstallation>Reference> VideoReference
ReferenceSource
DescriptionLocationEvent
Resets the transition area ofthe selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Reset.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
Reset
Resume a custom control athold.1. Click theBank button and
select the custom controlbank you want to resumea custom control on.
2. Click the CC button andselect the custom controlyou want to resume.
Special >Resume CC
Resume CC
Send the halt command to theselected camera.1. Click Camera Halt All.2. Click the Camera button
and select the device youwant to send thecommand to.
Devices >Camera
RoboticCamera — HaltAll
Recall a shot on the selectedcamera at the rate/speed setin the shot.1. Click Recall Shot.2. Click the Camera button
and select the device youwant to send thecommand to.
3. Click the Channel buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the shot numberyou want to recall from inthe Shot field.
Devices >Camera
RoboticCamera —Recall Shot
94 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Recall a shot on the selectedcamera as quickly as possible.1. Click Recall Shot (Fast).2. Click the Camera button
and select the device youwant to send thecommand to.
3. Click the Channel buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the shot numberyou want to recall from inthe Shot field.
Devices >Camera
RoboticCamera —Recall ShotFast
Store a shot on the selectedcamera.1. Click Store Shot.2. Click the Camera button
and select the device youwant to send thecommand to.
3. Click the Channel buttonand select the channelyou want to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the shot numberyou want to store to in theShot field.
Devices >Camera
RoboticCamera —Store Shot
Turn the Roll Clip feature on oroff for the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Value buttonand select whether rollclip is on (On) or not(Off).
Switcher >Transition >Roll Clip
Roll Clip
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the simulated customcontrol to the selected device.1. Click CC.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the bank of thecustom control in theBank field.
4. Enter the number of thecustom control in theCustom field.
Devices >RossTalk(Generic)
RossTalk CC(Generic)
Send the simulated customcontrol to the selected device.1. Click CC.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the bank of thecustom control in theBank field.
4. Enter the number of thecustom control in theCustom field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk CC(XPression)
Send the Clear All commandto the selected device.1. Click Clear Channel.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk ClearAll (XPression)
Send the Clear Framebuffercommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click Clear Channel.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk ClearChannel(XPression)
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 95
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Clear Framebuffercommand for a framebuffer andlayer to the selected device.1. Click Clear Channel.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
4. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk ClearLayer(XPression)
Send the Cue command for aspecific item and framebufferto the selected device.1. Click Cue (2).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Cue Channel(XPression)
Send the Cue command to theselected device.1. Click Cue.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Cue Current(XPression)
Send the Cue command for aspecific item to the selecteddevice.1. Click Cue (1).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Cue Item(XPression)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Cue command for aspecific item and location to theselected device.1. Click Cue (3).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
5. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Cue Layer(XPression)
Send amanual RossTalk stringto the selected device.1. Click RossTalk
CustomCmd.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the RossTalk stringin the Custom Cmd field.
Devices >RossTalk(Generic)
RossTalkCustomCommand(Generic)
Send amanual RossTalk stringto the selected device.1. Click RossTalk
CustomCmd.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the RossTalk stringin the Custom Cmd field.
Devices >RossTalk(Ultrix)
RossTalkCustomCommand(Ultrix™)
Send amanual RossTalk stringto the selected device.1. Click RossTalk Custom
Cmd.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the RossTalk stringin the Custom Cmd field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalkCustomCommand(XPression)
96 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Focus command fora specific item to the selecteddevice.1. Click Focus.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Focus(XPression)
Send the simulated GPI inputto the selected device.1. Click GPI.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the GPI you want tosimulate triggering in theGPI field.
Devices >RossTalk(Generic)
RossTalk —GPI (Generic)
Send the simulated GPI inputto the selected device.1. Click GPI.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the GPI you want tosimulate triggering in theGPI field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —GPI(XPression)
Send the Layer Off commandfor a specific framebuffer andlayer to the selected device.1. Click Layer Off.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
4. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Layer Off(XPression)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the end selected clockcommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click MV Clock End.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the number of theclock you want to performthe action on in the MVClock field.
Devices >RossTalk(Ultrix)
RossTalk—MVClock End(Ultrix™)
Send the pause selected clockcommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click MV Clock Pause.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the number of theclock you want to performthe action on in the MVClock field.
Devices >RossTalk(Ultrix)
RossTalk—MVClock Pause(Ultrix™)
Send the run selected clockcommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click MV Clock Run.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the number of theclock you want to performthe action on in the MVClock field.
Devices >RossTalk(Ultrix)
RossTalk—MVClock Run(Ultrix™)
Send the stop selected clockcommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click MV Clock Stop.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the number of theclock you want to performthe action on in the MVClock field.
Devices >RossTalk(Ultrix)
RossTalk—MVClock Stop(Ultrix™)
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 97
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Next command to theselected device.1. Click Next.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Next(XPression)
Send the Read command tothe selected device.1. Click Read.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Read Current(XPression)
Send the Read command for aspecific item to the selecteddevice.1. Click Read (1).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Read Item(XPression)
Send the Read command for aspecific item and layer to theselected device.1. Click Read (2).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
4. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Read Layer(XPression)
Send the Resume commandfor a framebuffer to theselected device.1. Click Resume Channel.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —ResumeChannel(XPression)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Resume commandfor a framebuffer and layer tothe selected device.1. Click Resume Layer.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
4. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Resume Layer(XPression)
Send the fire salvo commandto the selected device.1. Click SALVO.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the salvo you wantto fire in the SALVO field.
Devices >RossTalk(Ultrix)
RossTalk —Salvo (Ultrix™)
Send the Sequencer Downcommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click Sequencer Down.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —SequencerDown(XPression)
Send the Sequencer Upcommand to the selecteddevice.1. Click Sequencer Up.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Sequencer Up(XPression)
Send the Swap command fora specific framebuffer to theselected device.1. Click Swap (1).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Swap Channel(XPression)
98 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Swap command tothe selected device.1. Click Swap.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Swap Current(XPression)
Send the Swap command fora specific framebuffer and layerto the selected device.1. Click Swap (2).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
4. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Swap Layer(XPression)
Send the Take command for aspecific item and framebufferto the selected device.1. Click Take (2).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Take Channel(XPression)
Send the Take command for aspecific item to the selecteddevice.1. Click Take (1).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Take Item(XPression)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the Take command for aspecific item and location to theselected device.1. Click Take (3).2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer thatyou want to perform theaction on in the Channelfield.
5. Enter the layer that youwant to perform the actionon in the Layer field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Take Layer(XPression)
Send the Take Offlinecommand for a specific item tothe selected device.1. Click Take Offline.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk —Take Offline(XPression)
Send the Next command for aspecific item to the selecteddevice.1. Click Up Next.2. Click the RossTalk
Device button and selectthe device you want tosend the RossTalkcommand to.
3. Enter the take item id ofthe item you want toperform the action on inthe Take ID field.
Devices >RossTalk(XPression)
RossTalk— UpNext(XPression)
Load the custom reset settingsfor the selected area.1. Click the Include button
and select all thelocations that you want torecall the custom resetsettings on.
Switcher >LoadRState
RState, Load
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 99
DescriptionLocationEvent
Delete an entry from thesubstitution table.1. Click the Source button
and select the source thatyou want to delete thesubstitution(s) for. If morethan one substitutionentry exists for theselected source, all thoseentries will be deleted.
SwitcherInstallation> SourceSubstitution> DeleteSubst Table
SourceSubstitution,Delete
Set a source substitution forthe substitution table.1. Click the Source button
and select the source thatyou want to set asubstitution for.
2. Click the ME button andselect the MiniME™ thatyou want to assign asubstitution source to.
3. Click the Subst buttonand select the source youwant to substitute for theselected source.
SwitcherInstallation> SourceSubstitution> SourceME Subst
SourceSubstitution
Insert the current state of theswitcher into the customcontrol.1. Click State Attributes
and select the elementsthat you want to includein the state of the switcherwhen it is stored to thecustom control.
Special >State
State, Insert
Select the field that a videotransition will be performed on.1. Click a Switch Field
button to select whethervideo transitions areperformed on field 1 only(Field 1), field 2only(Field 2), or thecurrent field (Both).
SwitcherInstallation> FieldSwitch
Switching Field
Configures the next transitionarea of the selected area totake all keys off-air with thenext transition.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Trans Clear.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
Trans Clear
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the elements to beincluded in the next transitionof the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click theElements buttonand select backgroundand/or the keys that youwant to include in the nexttransition.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransElements
Trans Elements
Turn the transition limit featureon or off for the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Click the Value buttonand select whether translimit is on (On) or not(Off).
Switcher >Transition >ME TransLimit
Trans Limit —On/Off
Resets the transition limit pointof the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Reset Limit.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
Trans Limit —Reset
Sets the transition limit point ofthe selected area. You mustselect the point in the transitionthat you want to place the limitbefore running this event.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Action buttonand select Set Limit.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransAction
Trans Limit —Set
100 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the limit point for thetrans limit of the selected area.1. Click the ME button and
select the area that youwant to perform the eventon.
2. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
3. Enter the point in thetransition that you want toplace the trans limit in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >ME TransLimit Value
Trans Limit —Value
Select the video format that theswitcher will operate in.1. Click the Video Mode
button and select thevideo format for theswitcher.
SwitcherInstallation>Reference> VideoFormat
Video Mode
Send the Cue command andname of clip to cue to theselected device.1. Click Cue.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
4. Enter the identifier of theclip in the Cue field.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Cue
Query the selected device fora list of clips.1. Click Get Clips.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Get Clips
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the jog command to theselected device. The Jogcommand is not supported bythe internal Clip Player at thistime.1. Click Jog.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the amount youwant to jog in the Jogfield.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Jog
Send the Loop Off commandto the selected device.1. Click Loop Off.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Loop Off
Send the Loop On commandto the selected device.1. Click Loop On.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Loop On
Send the Play command to theselected device.1. Click Play.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Play
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 101
DescriptionLocationEvent
Send the record command tothe selected device.1. Click Record.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
4. Enter the identifier of theclip you want to record toin the Record field.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Record
Send the shuttle command tothe selected device. TheShuttle command is notsupported by the internal ClipPlayer at this time.1. Click Shuttle.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
4. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
5. Enter the speed you wantto shuttle in the Shuttlefield.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Shuttle
Send the Stop command to theselected device.1. Click Stop.2. Click the Video Server
button and select thedevice you want to sendthe command to.
3. Click aChannel button toselect the channel youwant to send thecommand to.
Devices >VideoServer
Video Server—Stop
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the custom matte colorfor the selected ME or aux.Each component of the HSLcolor must be insertedindividually. This is the secondcolor of the wash, the first coloris set from the matte color.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Matte buttonand selectWash.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Componentbutton and select the HSLcomponent you want toassign a value to. A valueshould be applied to allthree components.
5. Enter a value for theselected component in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Matte >Wash Color(HSL)
Wash Color(HSL)
Select a preset wash color forthe selected ME. This is thesecond color of the wash, thefirst color is set from the mattecolor.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Matte buttonand selectWash.
3. Click the Color buttonand select the color youwant to use.
Switcher >Matte >Wash Color(Preset)
Wash Color(Preset)
Reset the matte color for theselected ME. This is thesecond color of the wash, thefirst color is set from the mattecolor.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Matte buttonand selectWash.
Switcher >Matte >Wash ColorReset
Wash ColorReset
Disable the wash generator forthe selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
Switcher >Matte >WashEnabledReset
WashGenerator —Disable
102 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Enable the wash generator forthe selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click theWash buttonand select whether thewash generator isenabled (On) or not (Off).
Switcher >Matte >WashEnabled
WashGenerator —Enable
Select whether the wipereverses direction for everysecond transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Pattern buttonand selectWipe.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Parameterbutton and selectFlip-Flip.
5. Click the Value buttonand select whetherFlip-Flop is on (On) or off(Off).
Switcher >Transition >WipeDirection
Wipe Direction(Flip-Flop)
Select the direction for the wipetransition of the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Pattern buttonand selectWipe.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Parameterbutton and selectDirection.
5. Click the Value buttonand select whether thewipe moves in a forward(Forward) or reverse(Reverse) direction.
Switcher >Transition >WipeDirection
Wipe Direction
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the aspect ratio for thewipe pattern you want to usefor a wipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectAspect.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter an aspect ratio inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—Aspect Ratio
Select the custom color youwant to apply to the border ofthe pattern for the wipetransition of the selected ME.Each component of the HSLcolor must be insertedindividually.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Matte buttonand selectWipe Border.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Click the Componentbutton and select the HSLcomponent you want toassign a value to. A valueshould be applied to allthree components.
5. Enter a value for theselected component in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >WipeBorderColor (HSL)
Wipe Pattern—Border Color(HSL)
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 103
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the preset color youwant to apply to the border ofthe pattern for the wipetransition of the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Matte buttonand selectWipe Border.
3. Click the Color buttonand select the presetcolor you want to apply tothe border.
Switcher >Transition >WipeBorderColor(Preset)
Wipe Pattern—Border Color(Preset)
Select the size of border for thewipe pattern you want to usefor a wipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select BorderSize.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a size for the borderin the Value (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—Border Size
Select the amount of softnessto apply to the edge of thepattern or border for the wipepattern you want to use for awipe transition of the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectSoftness.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter an amount ofsoftness for the pattern orborder in the Value (%)field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—Edge Softness
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the number of times youwant to multiply the wipepattern horizontally for the wipetransition of the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectHorizontal Mult.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the number of timesthe pattern is multiplied inthe Value field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—HorizontalMultiplication
Select the pattern you want touse for a wipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Pattern buttonand select the pattern youwant to use for the wipe.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Effect
Wipe Pattern—Pattern
Select the rotation for the wipepattern you want to use for awipe transition of the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and selectRotation.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a rotation in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—Rotation
104 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the size for the wipepattern you want to use for awipe transition of the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select Size.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new size in theValue (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—Size
Select the number of times youwant to multiply the wipepattern vertically for the wipetransition of the selected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select VerticalMult.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter the number of timesthe pattern is multiplied inthe Value field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—VerticalMultiplication
Select the x-axis position forthe wipe pattern you want touse for a wipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select X-Pos.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—X-Position
DescriptionLocationEvent
Select the y-axis position forthe wipe pattern you want touse for a wipe transition of theselected ME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click the Parameterbutton and select Y-Pos.
3. Click the Change Typebutton and select whetheryou want to set(Absolute) or reset(Reset) the parameter.Some selections will notbe available when youreset the parameter.
4. Enter a new position inthe Value (%) field.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Param
Wipe Pattern—Y-Position
Reset the parameters ordirection and flip-flop for thewipe transition of the selectedME.1. Click the ME button for
the ME that you want toperform the event on.
2. Click Reset Params toreset the wipe parametersor Reset Direction toreset the wipe directionand flip-flop.
Switcher >Transition >Wipe Reset
Wipe Reset
Naming Custom ControlsEach custom control can be given a unique name andmnemonic color. The name is shown in the mnemonicdisplay when CCMnem is set to Split or Full.
To Name a Custom ControlThe procedure to name or rename a custom control is thesame.1. Press MENU > BANK 1 > EDIT2. Use the Bank knob to select the bank that the
custom control you want to name is stored on, orselect the bank button directly.
3. Use the CC knob to select the custom control thatyou want to name, or select the custom control onthe bus directly.
4. Use the Func knob to select Rename.5. Press the Func knob.6. Select a name as follows:
a) Use the Pos knob to select the characterposition to edit. A name can have up to 8character.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Custom Controls • 105
b) Use the Char knob to select a character for thecurrent position.
7. Press NEXT.8. Use the Size knob to select the text size for the
mnemonic label.• Small — 6 characters displayed on the top line,
and 2 on the bottom• Medium — 4 characters displayed on the top
line, and 4 on the bottom• Large — first 2 characters are displayed
9. Use the Color knob to select the background colorof the mnemonic.
10. Use the Inv knob to swap the color of the text andthe background.The Invert (Inv) selection is not applied when themnemonic is in split mode. In split mode, the tophalf of the display is inverted, and the bottom is not.
Deleting Custom ControlsAny custom control on the switcher can be deleted toremove unused customs to free up space for new customcontrols.
To Delete a Custom ControlDeleting a custom control from the switcher.
There is no undo for this delete function.1. Press MENU > BANK 1 > DELETE2. Use the Bank knob to select the bank that the
custom control you want to delete is stored on, orselect the bank button directly.
3. Use the CC knob to select the custom control thatyou want to delete, or select the custom control onthe bus directly.
4. Press the Func knob.5. Press theConfrm knob to delete the custom control.
Copying and Pasting CustomControls
The contents, or events, of a custom control can be copiedfrom one custom control and pasted to another. Alongwith the events, the name and mnemonic settings are alsocopied.
To Copy and Paste a Custom ControlCopy the contents of a custom control from one buttonto another.1. Press MENU > BANK 1 > Edit.
2. Use the Bank knob to select the bank that thecustom control you want to copy is on, or select thebank button directly.
3. Use the CC knob to select the custom control thatyou want to copy, or select the custom control onthe bus directly. If the custom control has a macrorecorded, an * is shown next to the number.
4. Press Copy.5. Select the custom control that you want to paste into.6. Press Paste.
106 • Custom Controls — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Network ConnectionsThe control panel connects to the frame over a standardethernet connection.The ethernet connection from the frame is also used toupload stills to the Media-Store channels, downloadswitcher data files, or control switcher functions usingDashBoard.The switcher uses the following network ports:• FTP — 21• SSH — 21• DashBoard — 5253• SLP — 427• Web Server — 80• RossTalk — 7788
Frame Network Setup (Ethernet)If you are connecting to the frame over ethernet you mustuse DashBoard to set the IP address of the frame. Theframe comes from the factory set with a static IP address(192.168.0.123) but can be set to use DHCP toautomatically obtain an IP address.
Note: If you use a DHCP server, it must be set to always givethe frame the same IP address. DashBoard and the CarboniteBlack control panel need a fixed IP address to connect to.
Tip: If you do not know the IP address of the frame, you canset DIP switch 1 on the frame to lock the IP address to192.168.0.123. The frame must be re-started for the new IPaddress to be applied.
To Connect to the FrameThe ethernet connection to the frame is used byDashBoard for control of the switcher using the graphicalinterface.
You need the IP address of the frame to connect to itmanually from DashBoard.1. Click File > New > Manual Connection.2. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the
switcher frame. The default IP address is192.168.0.123.
3. Click Detect Settings.4. Click Finish.
The frame appears in the Tree View.
To Change the IP AddressChange the IP address of the frame from DashBoard.1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Network.
2. Enter a name in the Switcher Name field. This isthe name that appears in the tree view in DashBoard.
3. Click Edit.4. Click an ETHX Mode button to set that network
port to use DHCP (DHCP), or a static IP address(Static).
5. For a static IP address, enter the IP address (ETHXIP Address), subnet mask (ETHXSubnetMask),and gateway (Gateway) you want to use.
6. Click Update.
Panel Network SetupThe Carbonite Black control panel comes from thefactory set with a static IP address (192.168.0.129) butcan be set to use DHCP to automatically obtain an IPaddress.The control panel is automatically discovered inDashBoard and appears asCarbonitePanel followed bythe MAC address of that particular panel.
Tip: If you do not know the IP address of the control panel, youcan set DIP switches on the panel to lock the IP address of thepanel to 192.168.0.129 and the IP address that it expects theframe at to 192.168.0.123. The panel must be re-started for thenew IP address to be applied. Refer to Control Panel DIPSwitches on page 148 for DIP settings.
To Configure the Network SettingChange the network setting of a Carbonite Black controlpanel.1. Double-click on the CarbonitePanel node and
click on the Ethernet tab.
Note: The Current DIP Switch field shows the state ofthe DIP1 and DIP2 switches on the control panel. Somesettings do not allow you to change the IP settings fromDashBoard.
2. Click a Method button to select whether to use astatic IP address (Static), or obtain an IP address(DHCP).
3. For a static IP address, enter the IP address (IPAddress), subnet mask (Subnet Mask), andgateway (Default Gateway) you want to use.
4. In the Carbonite IP Address field, enter the IPaddress of the frame you are connecting to.
5. Click a Panel ID button to select whether you wantto assign the panel as the master panel (Master), orone of the satellite panels (Sat. 1 or Sat. 2). Thepanel id sets what permissions the control panel hasto the resources on the frame.
6. Click Apply Changes.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Network Connections • 107
To Assign a Custom NameThe name appears in the tree view in DashBoard andallows you to easily identify your particular device.1. Double-click on the CarbonitePanel node and
click on the Panel Name, Permissions tab.2. In the Panel Name field, enter the new name.
FTP ConnectionYou can create a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) connectionfrom a computer to your switcher. You can use the FTPconnection to copy still images and animations to andfrom your switcher as well as copy Edit Decision List(EDL) files from your switcher.The procedure for creating an FTP connection from acomputer varies between operating systems and clientsoftware. Consult with the documentation that came withyour computer for assistance with creating an FTPconnection.
Tip: The FTP connection can be used to copy media items ontothe USB that is installed in the switcher.
To Create an FTP ConnectionThis procedure applies to Microsoft® Windows XP®
Professional and Windows® 7.1. On your computer launch Windows Explorer.2. In the address bar, type ftp://IP Address of your
switcher.You are prompted for a username and password.
3. Type the user name for the application your arecreating an FTP connection for. Each applicationhas specific requirements. The switcher will set theserequirements automatically based on the username.• xpression – used when creating a connection
from a Ross® XPression Motion Graphics Systemdirectly to the Media-Store channels on theswitcher, as well as any USB drive installed inthe switcher
• liveedl – used to create a connection to theLiveEDL folder on the switcher to download anedit decision list file form the switcher
• user – used to create a connection to the generalstorage folders on the switcher, as well as anyUSB drive installed in the switcher
Important: Do not copy a clip to the USBwhile a clip is playing. Copying a clip to theUSB while the Clip Player is playing a clipcan cause the clip to stutter or stop.
4. Enter the password password
Default IP AddressesDIP switches on the back of the control panel and frameare used set the IP address to a static default. Once youset the DIP switch, you must restart the control panel orframe to use the new IP address.
108 • Network Connections — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Video ReferenceThe flexible reference system in the switcher allows youto use an Interlaced video format as the reference tooperate the switcher in a video format of the samefrequency. Choosing a progressive video format as areference limits you to operating the switcher only in thatsame video format and frequency. For example, if youhave a 1080i 59.94Hz input reference you can operatethe switcher in 720p 59.94Hz, but not 1080i 50Hz.However, if you have a 720p 59.94Hz input reference,you can only operate the switcher in 720p 59.94Hz.
Supported Reference FormatsThe switcher supports a number of reference modes forboth internal and external reference signals. Referencesto 1080p 59.94Hz (A) and 1080p 50Hz (A) refer to 1080pLevel A only.UHD-QSD is not supported at this time.
Table 9: Supported Reference Formats
Usable FormatInput Reference
480i480i
480i 16:9
720p 59.94Hz
1080i 59.94Hz
1080pSF 29.97Hz
1080p 29.97Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)
UHDTV1 59.94Hz (UHD-2SI)
576i576i
576i 16:9
720p 50Hz
1080i 50Hz
1080pSF 25Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)
1080p 25Hz
UHDTV1 50Hz (UHD-2SI)
720p 50Hz720p 50Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)
UHDTV1 50Hz (UHD-2SI)
720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)
UHDTV1 59.94Hz (UHD-2SI)
Usable FormatInput Reference
1080p 60Hz (A)720p 60Hz
UHDTV1 60Hz (UHD-2SI)
576i1080i 50Hz
576i 16:9
720p 50Hz
1080i 50Hz
1080pSF 25Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)
1080p 25Hz
UHDTV1 50Hz (UHD-2SI)
480i1080i 59.94Hz
480i 16:9
720p 59.94Hz
1080i 59.94Hz
1080pSF 29.97Hz
1080p 29.97Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)
UHDTV1 59.94Hz (UHD-2SI)
1080p 60Hz (A)1080i 60Hz
UHDTV1 60Hz (UHD-2SI)
1080pSF 23.98Hz1080pSF 23.98Hz
The switcher allows you to use any interlaced videoformat to operate the switcher in any format of the samefrequency; however, the use of 480i or 576i (CompositeSync) reference signals for High Definition (720p, 1080i,or 1080p) video modes is not recommended.The use of composite sync reference formats isrecommended for Standard Definition video modes only,and provides stable outputs with jitter performance incompliance with SMPTE-259M specifications.
UHDTV1 ModeWhen the switcher is operating in a UHDTV1 videoformat, the number of available resources is reduced toprovide the additional processing power required forUHDTV1 production. The following table provides aquick overview of how the resources are re-allocated.
Note: Values represent maximum resources with all optionsinstalled.
UHDTV1SD/HD
1/21/3MEs (Min/Max)2
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Video Reference • 109
UHDTV1SD/HD
24MiniME™ Engines
4 + Trans4 + TransKeyers per ME
1121Canvas Generators
1/11/2Video Processor MultiViewer(Min/Max)2
0/11/2I/O MultiViewer (Min/Max)2
--38/34I/O Processor (Min/Max)2
24--3Input FSFCs/Output FCs (Min)
7+1 FC5--3Input FSFCs (Max)2
4--3Output FCs (Max)2
2/8--3Proc Amp/Color Correctors(Min/Max)2
YesNoHDR Support
YesNoWCG Support
282D DVE Channels Switcher Wide
24Chroma Keys (floating)
24Media-Store Channels (Video +Alpha)
1824SDI Video Inputs
1014SDI Video Outputs
Notes:1 Each Canvas consumes MiniME™ engines to generatethe output. The number of Canvas outputs that areavailable depends on the number of MiniME™ enginesthat are available.2 Software options are required to be installed to activatethe maximum number of resources.3 In SD/HD, the total number of color correctors, inputFSFCs, and output FCs is shared. In UHDTV1 there arededicated color corrector, input FSFC, and output FCresources.4 There are 2 FSFCs that are shared between inputs andoutputs.5 Input FC 8 can only be used to up-convert HD videosignals to UHDTV1. You cannot use this resource toframe-sync a UHDTV1 video signal.
To Set the UHDTV1 Switcher ModeSet the features and resources that you want to haveavailable on your switcher
Note: Only the Ultra mode is supported at this time.
1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT> NEXT.
2. Use the SwitcherMode knob to select the featuresthat you want enabled on your switcher.• SD/HD— the switcher operates in SD/HD video
formats.• UHD— the switcher operates in UHDTV1 video
formats.
3. Press the SwitcherMode knob.4. Press theReboot knob to restart the switcher in the
new mode.The switcher will restart in the new mode, but needsto be rebooted for all the changes to be implemented.
5. Wait for the switcher to come up again. If you areusing DashBoard wait for the pages to come backup. This may take a few minutes. If you are onlyusing the panel, wait for the menu system to comeback up.
6. Power cycle the frame by switching the power buttonOff and then On again.The switcher will come up in the new mode.
Reference and Video Mode SetupThe switcher supports both internal and externalreferences. An external reference is provided by anexternal device to the switcher through theREF INBNCon the frame. An internal reference is generated by theswitcher and can be fed out to other devices.The switcher automatically detects the reference signaland only shows the video modes that you can operatethe switcher in that are supported for that referenceformat.
To Set a Video ModeThe Vid Mode is the video format that the switcher isoperating in.
If you are using an external reference, ensure that aproper reference is connected to the REF IN input BNCon the frame.
Note: You must use an interlaced reference source to have theswitcher operate in an interlaced reference format if you areusing an external reference.
Tip: Reference settings can also be set up from the Referencetab on the Configuration node in DashBoard.
Note: For information on Dynamic Range and Color Gamutconversion, refer to High Dynamic Range (HDR) andWide ColorGamut (WCG) Conversion on page 133.
1. Press MENU > Ref
110 • Video Reference — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
2. Use the VidMode knob to select the video formatthat you want to use.The available video modes depends on the referenceformat coming into the switcher.
3. Press NEXT.4. Use the RefSrc knob to select an internal (Int) or
external (Ext) reference source.5. Press the RefSrc knob to confirm the reference
source.
Output Reference SynchronizersThe output reference synchronizers allow you to havethe switcher output a reference signal that other devices,such as cameras and video servers, can lock to.
Note: Different applications require different output referenceformats and delay settings. Consult a facility engineer forassistance in configuring these settings.
To Set Up an Output Reference SyncThe reference output allows the switcher to provide areference signal to other upstream or downstream devices.If the switcher is using internal reference, this referencesignal can be sent to other devices so that all yourequipment is synced to the same reference.1. Press MENU > Ref > NEXT.2. Use the RefO knob to select the reference output
BNC that you want to set up.3. Press the RefO knob.4. Use the RefO knob to select the reference format
you want to output from the switcher.The available output reference formats depend onthe video format that the switcher is operating in.You must be in a 50Hz video format for PAL and a59.94Hz video format for NTSC.
5. Use the Mode knob to select the type of delay youwant to apply to the reference signal.• V — vertical delay in lines• H — horizontal delay in pixels• F — frame delay in frames (NTSC/PAL only)
6. Use the Value knob to select the amount of delayyou want to apply to the selected Mode.You can reset the values by pressing NEXT and theRefO knob.
7. Press the Value knob.8. Press the Confrm knob to assign the output
reference synchronizer.
Aspect Ratio ConversionConverting between standard-definition andhigh-definition video formats often requires convertingbetween 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios. The switcher supportFull, Zoom, Letterbox, and Pillarbox conversions.In 480i and 576i video formats you can use either a 4:3or 16:9 aspect ratio.
FullThe video signal is scaled disproportionately to fill thedisplay of the new aspect ratio. Aspect distortion occursas the image is stretched/compressed to fit in the newaspect ratio.
Figure 19: 4:3 to 16:9 Full Aspect Ratio Conversion
Figure 20: 16:9 to 4:3 Full Aspect Ratio Conversion
ZoomThe central portion of the video signal is zoomed to fillthe display of the new video format. No aspect distortionis introduced but the edges of the video signal may becropped.
Figure 21: 4:3 to 16:9 Zoom Aspect Ratio Conversion
Figure 22: 16:9 to 4:3 Full Aspect Ratio Conversion
LetterboxBlack bars are added to the top and bottom of a 16:9image to display correctly in a 4:3 video format.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Video Reference • 111
Figure 23: 16:9 to 4:3 Letterbox Aspect Ratio Conversion
PillarboxBlack bars are added to the right and left of a 4:3 imageto display correctly in a 16:9 video format.
Figure 24: 4:3 to 16:9 Pillarbox Aspect Ratio Conversion
Switching Field (SD/HD Only)The switching field is the field in an interlaced videoformat that the switcher uses to transition from one videosource to another. An interlaced video format is madeup of two fields, field 1 (odd lines) and field 2 (evenlines).
Note: If you are running in a progressive video format, selectingan even or odd fields will cause the switcher to only allowtransitions on every second frame.
To Set the Switching FieldSet the field that transitions are performed on whenoperating in an SD/HD video format.
Note: If you are using a Frame Sync or Format Conversion(FSFC), transitions are locked to Field 1.
1. Press MENU > System > NEXT.2. Use the FldSwt or FrmSwt knob to select which
field video transitions occur on.• F1 — transitions occur on odd field• F2 — transitions occur on even field• Both— transitions occur on current field, either
even or odd
3. Press the FldSwt or FrmSwt knob to save thesettings.
112 • Video Reference — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Video Input SetupVideo sources come into the switcher through the inputHD-BNCs. Depending on how you want to use thesevideo sources, or where they come from, you may wantthe switcher to pair them together, or associate an externaldevice with them. Pairing two video sources together isusually used for an auto select key where an externaldevice, such as a character generator, outputs both a keyvideo and key alpha. Associating a video source with anexternal device allows special control over that deviceto become active when you select the source on a bus.
UHDTV1 InputsThe switcher can accept UHDTV1 inputs in Quad-Link3Gb/s UHD-2SI and UHD-QSD, or Single-Link 12Gb/sUHD-2SI. Different inputs consume a different numberof BNCs, depending on the format.
Note: Only inputs 3-6 and 8-11 can accept Quad-Link 3Gb/sUHD-2SI or UHD-QSD video signals. Only inputs 3 and 8 ofthese groups can accept Single-Link 12Gb/s UHD-2SI.
Tip: Single-Link 720p, 1080i and 1080p video signals can beup-converted on some inputs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
IN
Single-Link 12Gb/s 2SI/QSD
Quad-Link 3Gb/s 2SI/QSD5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OUT
Figure 25: UHD Input/Output
Auto Key SetupAn auto key allows you to associate a key alpha with akey video source in the switcher. When the video sourceis selected as a keyer, the key alpha is automatically used.
To Set Up an Auto Key AssociationAs well as input sources, internally generated sources,such as media-stores and color backgrounds, can be setup as an auto key.1. Press MENU > Config > Input.2. Use the Mnemnc knob to select the key video
source that you want to assign an alpha to.3. Use the Alpha knob to select the key alpha source
that you want to assign to the key video.• <none> — no alpha• XX — assign the source on the selected input as
a key alpha• BK — assign internal black as a key alpha• BG — assign the matte generator as a key alpha• MX — assign the video on Media-Store X as a
key alpha
• MXA — assign the alpha on Media-Store X asa key alpha
• PGM — assign the main program output as thekey alpha
• PRV — assign the main preview output as thekey alpha
• CLN— assign the main clean feed output as thekey alpha
• MEX — assign the program output of ME X asthe key alpha
• MEX PV — assign the preview output of ME Xas the key alpha
• MEX CL — assign the clean feed output of MEX as the key alpha
• MiniMEX — assign the output of MiniME™ Xas the key alpha
• MMXCmb — assign the combined alpha ofMiniME™ X as the key alpha
• CKXA— assign the alpha output of chroma keyX as the key alpha
4. Use the Mode knob to select whether the alpha isshaped Shaped, or unshaped (Linear).• Linear — switcher performs a multiplicative
key. The key alpha cuts a hole based on thegradient values of the alpha. Shades of gray aretranslated into transparency levels, giving thekey a soft edge. Unshaped key alphas can alsobe considered true linear alphas.
• Shaped — switcher perform an additive key.With shaped keys, the key alpha cuts a holebased on the monochrome value of the alpha.Shades of gray are translated into either whiteor black, giving the key a hard edge. Shaped Keyalphas are sometimes used with CharacterGenerators to cut very precise holes for the fill.
Source NamesEach video source in the switcher can be given a uniquename. These names can be customized for how theyappear on the mnemonics by adjusting the size or thefont and the background color.
Note: If a TSL ID is assigned to a source, the switcher overwritesthe source name on the MultiViewer and mnemonics with theTSL name. If there is no TSL name, or it has not been receivedyet, the source name is TSL X, where X is the TSL number. Forthe labels on the MultiViewer, a combination of the TSL nameand switcher source name are used. The new TSL name ispassed from the switcher to any downstream TSL devices.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Video Input Setup • 113
To Set Up a Source NameSource names appear on mnemonics, menus, and on theMultiViewer.
Source names are restricted to eight characters in length.1. Press MENU > Config > Input > Mnemnc.2. Use the Save knob to select the video source that
you want to change the name for.3. Change a character in the source name as follows:
a) Use the Pos knob to select the position in thename that you want to add or change a characterin.You can also press the Pos knob to clear thefield.
b) Use the Char knob to select the character youwant to place at the selected position.
4. Enter the remaining characters in the new name.5. Press NEXT.6. Use theSize knob to select the size of font you want
to use on the mnemonic display.• Large — first two characters are shown• Medium — all eight (8) characters are shown
on two lines with four characters on the top line• Small — all eight (8) characters are shown on
two lines with six characters on the top line
7. Use the Color knob to select background color ofthe mnemonic display.
8. Use the Inv knob to select if you want to invert thebackground color and the font color.
9. Press NEXT.10. Press the Save knob.
To Assign a TSL ID to a Video InputPass router mnemonic names to the switcher with TSLID data.
The switcher accepts incoming TSL data on TCP port5727.1. Press MENU > Config > Input > NEXT > NEXT
> NEXT > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.2. Use the Input knob to select the input that you want
to assign a TSL ID to.3. Use the TSLAdr knob to select the TSL ID that you
want to assign to the selected input.4. Use the TSLTly knob to select how the sources are
tallied and which mnemonic name is use.
• Off— TSL tally information for the selected IDis ignored. TSL mnemonic source names areused.
• On — source tallied on the MultiViewer basedon the TSL input. TSL mnemonic source namesare used.
• Tally— source tallied on the MultiViewer basedon the TSL input. TSL mnemonic source namesare not used.
Note: If a TSL ID is assigned to a source, the switcher overwritesthe source name on the MultiViewer and mnemonics with theTSL name. If there is no TSL name, or it has not been receivedyet, the source name is TSL X, where X is the TSL number. Forthe labels on the MultiViewer, a combination of the TSL nameand switcher source name are used. The new TSL name ispassed from the switcher to any downstream TSL devices.
Control Panel Button InsertsInsert films can be installed into most buttons on thecontrol panel. Insert films allow you to label specificsource buttons, control buttons, or replace the defaultbutton names with those of a different language.Button insert templates can be downloaded from RossVideo.
To Install a Button Insert1. Remove the Cap Assembly from the Switch
Assembly by grasping it firmly and pulling awayfrom the control panel surface.
Figure 26: Removing Cap Assembly
2. Remove the Lens from the Diffuser using a commonend micro screwdriver.
Figure 27: Removing Lens from Diffuser
3. Place the Insert Film into the Lens so the readableside is facing up. The notches on the sides of the
114 • Video Input Setup — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Lens must be at the sides of the text on the InsertFilm.
Figure 28: Inserting Film
4. Aligning the notches on the sides of the Lens andDiffuser, press the Lens and Diffuser together untilthey click.
5. Aligning the notches on the sides of the CapAssembly to the tabs on the side of the SwitchAssembly, press Cap Assembly down onto theSwitch Assembly with a rolling motion until theyclick together.
Figure 29: Removing Lens from Diffuser
Bus MapsAny video input can be mapped to any source button onthe control panel using a bus map. There is an editablebus map and a fixed, default, bus map, that can be appliedto all MEs on the switcher. Each source button can havetwo inputs assigned (a standard source and a shiftedsource).
Note: There may be gaps in the bus map when you switch toUHDTV1.
To Create a Bus MapThe bus map assigns video sources to the physical buttonson the control panel.
All buses and MEs share the same bus map.1. Press MENU > Config > BusMap.2. Use the XptBtn knob to select the source button to
assign a video source to.
3. Use the Input knob to select the source to assign tothe selected button on the unshifted bus.• <none> — not assigned to a source (cannot be
selected on a bus)• XX — video inputs• BK — black• MX — Media-Store video channels• MXA — Media-Store alpha channels• ClipPl — clip player• MEXMW — Media-Store video channel used
for MediaWipe effects on ME X (if installed)• MEXMWA — Media-Store alpha channel used
for MediaWipe effects on ME X (if installed)• BG — matte generator• PGM — main program output of the switcher
(cannot be selected on an ME/Canvas)• PRV — main preview output of the switcher
(cannot be selected on an ME/Canvas)• CLN — main clean feed output of the switcher
(cannot be selected on an ME/Canvas)• MEX — main program output of ME X (cannot
be selected on the same or lower number ME)• MEX PV — main preview output of ME X
(cannot be selected on the same or lower numberME)
• MEX CLN — main clean feed output of ME X• MEXBg— source on background bus of ME X.• MEXPst — source on preset bus of ME X.• MEXKYV — key Y video of ME X (cannot be
selected on the same or lower number ME)• MEXKYA — key Y alpha of ME X (cannot be
selected on the same or lower number ME)• AUXX — Aux buses• MinMEX — MiniME™ program• MMX PV — source on preset bus of MiniME™
X.
Note: The MiniME™ preset only shows the source thatis selected on the preset bus for the MiniME™. Thisdoes not include keys or any video manipulation thatis done if the MiniME™ is used as part of a Canvas.
• MMXCmb — combined alpha of MiniME™ X• MMXBg — source on background bus of
MiniME™ X.• MMXPst — source on preset bus of MiniME™
X.• MMXKYV — key Y video of MiniME™ X• MMXKYA — key Y alpha of MiniME™ X• CaXBg— source on background bus of Canvas
X.• CaXPst — source on preset bus of Canvas X.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Video Input Setup • 115
• CaXKYV — key Y video of Canvas X• CaXKYA — key Y alpha of Canvas X• CKX — chroma key X video• CKXA — chroma key X alpha• Shift — access shifted bus
4. Use the Shift knob to select the source to assign tothe selected button on the shifted bus.
To Reset the Bus Map1. Press MENU > Reset > NEXT > NEXT > Dfault
BusMap.2. Press the Confrm knob to reset the bus map.
GPI Device ControlYou can assign a GPI output to a video source for basicexternal device control. When a video source is takenon-air, the switcher can be set to trigger a GPI output,with a pre-delay. The external device can be set up tocue a clip, or load a page when it receives the GPI inputtrigger.
To Assign a GPI to a Video SourceAssign a GPI to a video source to trigger events onexternal devices.1. Press MENU > Config > Input > NEXT > NEXT
> NEXT > NEXT.2. Use the Input knob to select the video source that
you want to assign a GPI output to.If you are using the GPI to control the device, thevideo source should be the video output coming fromthe device.
3. Use theGPO knob to select the GPI output that youwant to assign to the video source.
Note: You must have GPIs set as outputs to be able toassign them to the video source.
4. Use the Predly knob to select the pre-delay time,in frames, you want to use with the GPI output.When you transition a video source with a GPIassigned to it, and the Roll Clip feature is active, theswitcher triggers the GPI output, and then waits thepre-delay time before performing the transition. Thelength of the pre-delay is usually the length of timeyour video server requires to start playing a clip oryour character generator requires to load a page.
116 • Video Input Setup — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Video Output SetupThe frame has a number of output HD-BNCs that canhave any video source in the switcher, includingMedia-Store channels, aux bus, and clean feed assignedto them.
UHDTV1 OutputsWith the exception of the MultiViewer outputs, all videooutputs are a single 12Gb/s UHD-2SI signal. An FSFCcan be assigned to the output to convert it to a single linkHD signal. Quad-Link output is not supported.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
IN
Single-Link 12Gb/s 2SI/QSD
Quad-Link 3Gb/s 2SI/QSD5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OUT
Figure 30: UHD Input/Output
Output SourcesYou can assign a video source or bus to an output BNC.Some outputs can only be used for certain features.
Note: An I/O Processor must be assigned to the output to beable to convert it.
DownConverters
I/O MultiViewerVid ProcMultiViewer
OutBNC
noyesno1
noyesno2
nonoyes3
nonoyes4
yesnono5-14
To Assign a Source to an Output1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT
> Output Config.2. Use the Output knob to select the output you want
to assign a source to.3. Use the Source knob to select the source you want
to assign to the output.• Physical — the physical inputs to the switcher
on the input BNCs.• Internal — the internally generated sources of
the switcher (ME, MiniME™, chroma keyoutputs, etc.).• BK — black• BG — matte generator• MX — Media-Store video channel X
• MXA — Media-Store alpha channel X• MEXMW— Media-Store video channel used
for MediaWipe effects on ME X (if installed)• MEXMA— Media-Store alpha channel used
for MediaWipe effects on ME X (if installed)• MinMEX — main program output of
MiniME™ X• MMX PV — main preview output of
MiniME™ X• MMXCmb — combined alpha of MiniME™
X• PGM— main program output of the switcher• PRV— main preview output of the switcher• CLN — clean feed for main program of
switcher• MEX — main program output of ME X (if
installed)• MEX PV — main preview output of ME X
(if installed)• MEX CL — clean feed output of ME X (if
installed)• CKX — chroma key X video• CKXA — chroma key X alpha
• Auxes — the aux buses.• ME Follows— the background, preset, and key
buses of each ME.• MEXBg — source on background of ME X
(if installed)• MEXPst — source on preset output of ME
X (if installed)• MEXKYV — key Y video of ME X (if
installed)• MEXKYA — key Y alpha of ME X (if
installed)
• MiniME Follows — the background, preset,and key buses of each MiniME™.• MMXBg — source on background of
MiniME™ X• MMXPst — source on preset output of
MiniME™ X• MMXKYV — key Y video of MiniME™ X• MMXKYA — key Y alpha of MiniME™ X
• Canvas Follows — the background, preset,and key buses of each Canvas.• CanXBg — source on background of
Canvas X• CanXPst — source on preset output of
Canvas X• CanXKYV — key Y video of Canvas X
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Video Output Setup • 117
• CanXKYA — key Y alpha of Canvas X
Note: The MiniME™ preset only shows the source that isselected on the preset bus for the MiniME™. This does notinclude keys or any video manipulation that is done if theMiniME™ is used as part of a Canvas.
Ancillary DataAncillary data is information such as closed captioningor embedded audio that is included in the non-activevideo portions of the video signal. These portions includethe Horizontal Ancillary Data Space (HANC) andVertical Ancillary Data Space (VANC).The switcher can be configured to strip or pass this datafrom the video output.
Note: Frame Converters and Synchronizers strip embeddedaudio data from the video signal.
The following restrictions apply to ancillary data beingincluded in the output:• All ME program buses pass ancillary data.• MultiViewer outputs do not include any ancillary
data.• MiniME™ and Canvas outputs do not include any
ancillary data unless an ME with ancillary data isre-entered onto the background bus.
• ME Preview does not include ancillary data unlessthe background is not selected as part of the nexttransition.
• A MiniME™ or Canvas can include ancillary data ifan ME is re-entered onto the background.
• Any format conversion on the input video signal.• Setting ancillary data to be stripped.
To Strip or Pass Ancillary DataStrip or pass ancillary data on video outputs. Videomanipulation such as FSFC conversion automaticallystrips ancillary data from the video signal.1. Press MENU > System > NEXT.2. Use the Anclry knob to select whether ancillary
data is stripped or passed.• Strip — ancillary data is stripped• Pass — ancillary data is passed unmodified
FlexiClean Clean FeedFlexiClean clean feed provides a second program outputper ME that is derived from a different point in the videolayering than the standard program output. The cleanfeed can be set to come before any key in the videolayering for an ME. This allows you to remove particularkeys without affecting the primary program output.
KEY 1 KEY 2PGM/PST KEY 3 KEY 4
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with cleanfeeds:• Recalling a memory register using MemoryAI may
cause the clean feed output to look different thanexpected. MemoryAI allows key elements to berecalled to other keys than originally resulting indifferent key layering.
To Set Up Clean FeedClean Feed can be taken before any or all of the keyerson an ME. This allows you to have a secondary outputof an ME without any branding for re-broadcast orarchival.1. Press MENU > System.2. Press theClean knob to select the ME that you want
to set the clean feed for.3. Use the Clean knob to select which key the clean
feed is taken before.The selected key, and all keys after it, are notincluded in the clean feed output.
External Layer ModeThe clean feed for an ME is used to create a compositealpha from the keyers on that ME that is then availableas a single alpha source. This allows you to output boththe video and alpha from an ME to an external switcher.The key video comes from the output of the ME and thekey alpha comes from the clean feed of the ME.The alphas that are included in the layer mode output areset with the keyer buttons in the next transition area.Toggle a keyer button on to include the alpha from thatkeyer in the layer mode output.When layer mode is turned on for an ME, you arerestricted to cut, dissolve, and wipe transitions.MediaWipe and DVE transitions are not available.
Tip: To use layer mode internally, select the clean feed for theME that is set to layer mode as the alpha for an auto key onanother ME or a MiniME™.
To Set Up Layer Mode1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT
> NEXT > NEXT.2. Press the LyrMod knob to select the ME that you
want to set the layer mode for.
118 • Video Output Setup — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
3. Use the LyrMod knob to turn the layer mode featureon (On) or off (Off).
On-Air SettingSome switcher outputs can be set to be considered on-airor not. This allows you to set which outputs are tallied,how resource allocation is divided, and how the Roll Clipfeature works.
To Set the On-Air Status for an Output1. Press MENU > Config > NEXT > On Air.2. Use the Type knob to select the type of switcher
output.• ME — the program output of an ME.• Aux — the output of an Aux bus.• MiniME— the program output of the MiniME™.• Canvas — all MiniME™ outputs of a Canvas.
3. Use the Index knob to select the particular switcheroutput.For example, if you select type as Aux, an indexselection of 8 corresponds to Aux bus 8.
4. Use the OnAir knob to select whether the output isconsidered on-air (On) or not (Off).
TalliesTallies are simple contact closure relays that the switcheruses to signal other devices, and users, that a particularvideo source is on-air. Typically, tallies are used to lighta red light on a camera to show people that they are on-airand what camera they should be looking at.
To Set Up a Tally1. Press MENU > Config > NEXT > Tally.2. Press the Add knob.
If you are editing, or deleting, an existing tally, usethe Add knob to select the tally and press the Edit,or Delete, knob.
3. Use the Tally knob to select the tally or GPI outputthat you want to set up. This is the tally or GPInumber, not the pin on the tally connector.
Note: A GPI must be set to tally mode before it can beused as a tally. Refer to To Set Up a GPI Output on page142 for information in setting a GPI as a tally.
4. Use the Input knob to select the video source thatyou want to tally.• XX — video inputs 1-24• BK — black
• BG — matte generator• MX — Media-Store video channels• MXA — Media-Store alpha channels
5. Use theOutput knob to select the bus that you wantto video source tallied for. When the video sourceis selected on this bus, the tally is triggered.• OnAir — on-air• OnPrv — on preview
6. Press the Tally knob.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Video Output Setup • 119
MultiViewerThe MultiViewer allows you to view multiple videosources from a single output BNC. Video inputs oroutputs on the switcher, including Program, Preview,and Media-Store channels, can be assigned to any boxon the MultiViewer.Both I/O MultiViewer and Video Processor MultiViewerare supported by the switcher. These MultiViewers differin the video sources they have access to.• I/O MultiViewer — all input HD-BNCs and output
HD-BNCs 5-12.• Video Processor MultiViewer — all input
HD-BNCs and all video bus outputs, source overlay,and used for ViewControl
Tip: The I/O MultiViewer can show you what is assigned to aspecific output HD-BNCs where the Video Processor MultiViewercan show you what is selected on a specific bus. For example,the Video Processor MultiViewer can show you what is selectedon ME 1 key 2, where the I/O MultiViewer can show you thevideo that is being fed out of HD-BNC 6.
A time-clock can be added as an overlay to theMultiViewer showing either system time or time code.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with aMultiViewer:• I/O MultiViewer outputs are assigned to output BNCs
1-2.• Video Processor MultiViewer outputs are assigned
to output BNCs 3-4.• Only the Video Processor MultiViewer can be used
for ViewControl.• You cannot view output HD-BNCs 13-14 on the I/O
MultiViewer in SD/HD mode.• The layout is configured independently for each
MultiViewer.• Inputs are displayed with a red border when they are
on-air. A green border is displayed when the input isselected on the Preset bus.
• When the switcher is operating in astandard-definition video format, the MultiViewer isshown in high-definition.
• All ancillary data is stripped from the MultiVieweroutputs.
MultiViewer Output FormatsDepending on the format the switcher is operating in, theMultiViewer may output a different video format thanthe switcher is operating in.
MultiViewer FormatSwitcher Video Format
1080i 59.94Hz480i
1080i 50Hz576i
720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz
720p 50Hz720p 50Hz
1080i 50Hz1080i 50Hz
1080i 59.94Hz1080i 59.94Hz
1080pSF 23.98Hz1080pSF 23.98Hz
1080i 50Hz1080pSF 25Hz
1080i 59.94Hz1080pSF 29.97Hz
1080p 25Hz1080p 25Hz
1080p 29.97Hz1080p 29.97Hz
1080i 50Hz1080p 50Hz
1080i 59.94Hz1080p 59.94Hz
1080p 50HzUHDTV1 50Hz
1080p 59.94HzUHDTV1 59.94Hz
1080p 60HzUHDTV1 60Hz
To Set Up a I/O MultiViewerSelect a layout for the MultiViewer, assign sources tothe boxes, and configure mnemonic names and tallies.1. Press MENU > System > MultiView.2. Use the MView knob to select the I/O MultiViewer
that you want set up.3. Use the Layout knob to select the arrangement of
the boxes that you want to use for the selected I/OMultiViewer.
4. Use the Transp knob to adjust the transparency ofthe background behind the source label for theselected I/O MultiViewer.
5. Press NEXT.6. Use the Tally knob to select how boxes on the Video
Processor MultiViewer are tallied.• Box — red or green border is shown around the
outside of the Video Processor MultiViewer box• Label — red or green boxes are shown inside
the label area of the Video ProcessorMultiViewer box
• LblRev— the same as Label, but the placementof the tally boxes is swapped
7. Press NEXT.
120 • MultiViewer — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
8. Use the FSLBL knob to select whether FSFC isshown on the source labels (On) or not (Off) whena FSFC is applied to the source.
Tip: Refer to To Set Up a MultiViewer Clock on page 122for information on setting up the clock overlay.
9. Press NEXT.10. Use the Box knob to select the box on the I/O
MultiViewer grid that you want to configure.For example, MV1:4 is box 4 on I/O MultiViewer1, and MV2:3 is box 3 on I/O MultiViewer 2.
11. Use the In/Out knob to select the source or bus youwant to assign to the box.When you assign an output to a box, the switcherroutes the source selected on that bus to the box, andnot the output of the bus.
12. Use the Border knob to turn the border around theI/O MultiViewer box off (Off), white (White), orblack (Black).When the border is turned off, some distortion maybe visible around the edges of the box.
13. Press NEXT.14. Use the Aspect knob to turn aspect ratio markers
for the I/O MultiViewer box on (Aspect) or off(Off).
15. Press NEXT.16. Use the Label to select the position for the source
label (Top or Bottom) or turn the source label off(Off).
17. Use the Display knob to select whether the sourcename on the label shows the internal mnemonicname (Mnemonic), the TSL UMD name (TSL),or both names (Both).
Tip: If you select a source on an aux bus that does nothave a TSL UMD name, the mnemonic name is usedinstead on the MultiViewer.
18. Press NEXT.19. Use the GrnTly knob to turn the preview (green)
tally for the Video Processor MultiViewer box onor off.
20. Use theRedTly knob to turn the program (red) tallyfor the Video Processor MultiViewer box on or off.
21. Press NEXT.22. Configure additional I/O MultiViewer boxes as
required.
To Set Up a Video ProcessorMultiViewer
Select a layout for the Video Processor MultiViewer,assign sources to the boxes, and configure mnemonicnames and tallies.1. Press MENU > System > MultiView.2. Use the MView knob to select the Video Processor
MultiViewer that you want set up.3. Use the Layout knob to select the arrangement of
the boxes that you want to use for the selected VideoProcessor MultiViewer.
4. Use the Transp knob to adjust the transparency ofthe background behind the source label for theselected Video Processor MultiViewer.
5. Press NEXT.6. Apply an overlay to the Video Processor
MultiViewer as follows:a) Use the Ovrlay knob to turn the overlay on
(On) or off (Off).Note: The overlay feature is only available when alayout of less than 16 boxes is used.
Tip: The overlay is primarily used for Video ProcessorMultiViewer, but can also be used to overlay a camerashot of a shot-clock over the MultiViewer output.
b) Use the Src/C knob to select a video sourcethat you want to overlay over the VideoProcessor MultiViewer output.
c) Press the Src/C knob and use the S/Clip knobto adjust the clipping of the overlay source.At 0% the overlay source is completely opaque,and at 100% it is completely transparent.
7. Press NEXT.8. Use the Tally knob to select how boxes on the Video
Processor MultiViewer are tallied.• Box — red or green border is shown around the
outside of the Video Processor MultiViewer box• Label — red or green boxes are shown inside
the label area of the Video ProcessorMultiViewer box
• LblRev— the same as Label, but the placementof the tally boxes is swapped
9. Press NEXT.10. Use the FSLBL knob to select whether FSFC is
shown on the source labels (On) or not (Off) whena FSFC is applied to the source.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — MultiViewer • 121
Tip: Refer to To Set Up a MultiViewer Clock on page 122for information on setting up the clock overlay.
11. Press NEXT.12. Use the Box knob to select the box on the Video
Processor MultiViewer grid that you want toconfigure.For example, MV1:4 is box 4 on Video ProcessorMultiViewer 1, and MV2:3 is box 3 on VideoProcessor MultiViewer 2.
Note: When you assign an output to a box, the switcherroutes the source selected on that bus to the box, and notthe output of the bus.
13. Use the In/Out knob to select the source or bus youwant to assign to the box.When you assign an output to a box, the switcherroutes the source selected on that bus to the box, andnot the output of the bus.
14. Use the Border knob to turn the border around theVideo Processor MultiViewer box off (Off), white(White), or black (Black).When the border is turned off, some distortion maybe visible around the edges of the box.
15. Press NEXT.16. Use the Aspect knob to turn aspect ratio markers
for the Video Processor MultiViewer box on(Aspect) or off (Off).
17. Press NEXT.18. Use the Label knob to turn source labels for the
Video Processor MultiViewer box off, or on in aselected position (Bottom or Top).
19. Press NEXT.20. Use the Label to select the position for the source
label (Top or Bottom) or turn the source label off(Off).
21. Use the Display knob to select whether the sourcename on the label shows the internal mnemonicname (Mnemonic), the TSL UMD name (TSL),or both names (Both).
Tip: If you select a source on an aux bus that does nothave a TSL UMD name, the mnemonic name is usedinstead on the MultiViewer.
22. Press NEXT.23. Use the GrnTly knob to turn the preview (green)
tally for the Video Processor MultiViewer box onor off.
24. Use theRedTly knob to turn the program (red) tallyfor the Video Processor MultiViewer box on or off.
25. Press NEXT.26. Configure additional Video Processor MultiViewer
boxes as required.
To Set Up a MultiViewer ClockThe clock can show the current system time or LTC databeing sent to the switcher.
1. Press MENU > System > MultiView > NEXT >NEXT > NEXT > Edit Clock.
2. Use the Clock knob to select the clock source todisplay.• Off — turns the clock off• Tmcode — displays the timecode fed to the
switcher (hh:mm:ss:ff)• System — displays the system time of the
switcher in 12-hour or 24-hour format(hh:mm:ss)
3. For a Timecode clock, use the LTCFrm knob toselect whether the number of frames for a timecodeis displayed (On) or not (Off).
4. For a System clock, use the Format knob to set howthe time is displayed.• 24h — time is displayed in 24-hour format.• 12h — time is displayed in 12-hour format
without am/pm.• AM/PM — time is displayed in 12-hour format
with am/pm.
5. Press NEXT.6. Use the X Pos, Y Pos, and Size knobs to position
the clock and change the size.7. Press NEXT.8. Use the LoadFg knob to select the color of the text
for the clock and press the knob.9. Use the LoadBg knob to select the background
color for the clock and press the knob.10. Press NEXT.11. Use the FgHue knob to adjust the hue of the text
color for the clock.12. Use the FgSat knob to adjust the saturation of the
text color for the clock.13. Use the FgLum knob to adjust the luminance of the
text color for the clock.14. Press NEXT.15. Use the BgHue knob to adjust the hue of the
background color for the clock.16. Use the BgSat knob to adjust the saturation of the
background color for the clock.
122 • MultiViewer — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
17. Use the BgLum knob to adjust the luminance ofthe background color for the clock.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — MultiViewer • 123
MultiScreenMultiScreen works by breaking your display intoindividual panels. Each panel is represented by a tile inMultiScreen and the entire display is represented by thecanvas.To properly set up MultiScreen you must calculate thetotal number of pixels on your display (width and height).In the example shown below we are using a display thatis 3840 pixels wide and 2160 pixels high. Thisinformation is entered as the canvas size.
Tip: MultiScreen uses a MiniME™ to create a tile. The two termsare used interchangeably in the menus.
Once the canvas has been set, you need to calculate howmany tiles it will take to cover the canvas. The size ofthe tiles is determined by the video format the switcheris operating in. For example, if you are a 1080 format,each tile will be 1920 pixels wide by 1080 pixels high.MultiScreen can automatically position the tiles in an Xby Y grid over the canvas.
Tip: If your canvas is larger or smaller than the grid of tiles,make sure to use enough tiles to cover the entire canvas.
Putting video onto the tiles can be done in a number ofways, depending on how the background graphic youwant to use was created. In the case of a pre-tiled source,the background image has already been divided up intoindividual segments. A separate video source is fed intothe switcher for each tile. In the example below, tile 1 is
fed the video source on BNC 1 (Source 1), tile 2 is fedform BNC 2, and so on.
Tip: When dealing with pre-tiled sources, it is recommendedthat you set up a substitution table for all the sources you willuse. This allows you to select a source on one MiniME™ andhave the switcher automatically select the corresponding sourceson the other MiniME™ buses.
Alternatively to the pre-tiles sources, MultiScreen canuse DVE resources to stretch a single image over theentire background.
MultiScreen Video Processor SetupThe MultiScreen compositing engine allows you to mapswitcher outputs (Tile/MiniME™) to regions on yourLED display (Canvas). With the tiles laid out on thecanvas, background images can be stretched (BackgroundDVE) or tiled (Pre-Tiled Source) across the entire canvas.
Tip: The size and number of the canvases depends on thenumber of tiles you have available.
124 • MultiScreen — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Keys are automatically interpolated between tiles acrossthe entire canvas. As the key moves from one tile toanother, the keyer for that MiniME™ takes over. Youmust keep in mind how many keyers you are using oneach tile as you move keys around the canvas.
MultiScreen TermsThe following terms are used when discussingMultiScreen:• Canvas— The pixel-based surface area of your LED
display. For irregular shaped display assemblies, yourcanvas should be the maximum height and width ofyou display.
• Tile — The individual MiniME™ video outputs ofthe switcher that go to each panel of the display. Howthe tiles are arranged on the canvas must match howthe panels are arranged on the display.
• Bezel — The pixel compensation for any bezel onthe edges of the individual panels that make up thedisplay. Bezel compensation in the absolute distancebetween the active pixels on the panels, and not thesize of the bezel on each panel. Adjust bezel valuesbased on visual inspection of active video on thedisplay.
• Background DVE — DVE resources are used tostretch the background image to cover the entirecanvas. DVE resources may not be needed if pre-tiledsources are used with the substitution table.
• Pre-Tiled Sources — The background image hasalready been separated for each tile of the canvas.Each part is fed into the switcher as a separate videosource and a substitution table is used to tell theswitch which source to put on each tile/MiniME™.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when setting up MultiScreen:• The Canvas uses MiniME™/Tile resources to provide
the keys and outputs. As a key crosses from one tileto the next, a key from either of the MiniME™/Tileoutputs is being used to provide the two halves of thekey.
• The Canvas can either take separate parts of apre-tiled source, or scale a single source to the sizeof the Canvas output. When you use a pre-tiledsource, you must assign sources to eachMiniME™/Tile that is used in the Canvas. Thissubstitution table allows you to select a single sourceon the Canvas program bus and the switcherautomatically assigns the required source to eachMiniME™/Tile.
• The Canvas does not support edge blending.• In UHDTV1 there are only 2 MiniME™/Tile outputs.
To Set Up MultiScreenCreate your canvas and then overlay tiles to cover thecanvas area with video.1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Canvases.2. Click Canvas X to select the Canvas you want to
set up.On the right of the screen is a canvas workspacewith a visual representation of the canvas in red.Tiles appear as numbered gray boxes in theworkspace. The MiniME™/tiles are the only outputsof the system. The canvas is shown to help visualizethe placement of the tiles and should be the samepixel size as your target display.
3. Click a CanX for each Tile/MiniME to assign thattile to the selected canvas. A tile can only be appliedto one canvas at a time.
Tip: Click Off to have the tile not applied to any of thecanvases. This does not turn off the output of the MiniME™.
The tiles appears as a grey boxes on the canvasworkspace you apply them to.
4. In the Canvas Size area, enter the Width andHeight of your display in pixels.A red box representing the canvas is shown in theworkspace.
5. Click Layout Presets and select how you wantthe tiles arranged on the canvas.• Num X Tiles — enter the number of columns
of tiles you want.• Num Y Tiles — enter the number of rows of
tiles you want.• X Bezel Size — enter the size of the gap you
want between columns of tiles to compensate fordisplay bezels or projector edges. This is the totalgap and not the size of an individual bezel.
• Y Bezel Size — enter the size of the gap youwant between rows of tiles to compensate for
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — MultiScreen • 125
display bezels or projector edges. This is the totalgap and not the size of an individual bezel.
Note: The canvas size does not automatically compensatefor bezel offsets.
6. Click Create.The tiles are laid out on the canvas from the top/leftcorner to the bottom/right corner.
7. Click a Background DVEs button to select howDVE resources are used to scale sources for theCanvas screen.• Off — DVE resources are not allocated to the
Canvas for scaling of background sources.• On — DVE resources are always allocated to
the Canvas for scaling of background sources.This reduces the number of available DVEresources to the switcher when a Canvas is turnedon.
• Dynamic — DVE resources are dynamicallyallocated to the Canvas for scaling of backgroundsources if there is no substitution table.
Note: If there are no DVE resources to scale thebackground source across the entire Canvas, the switcherneeds a substitution table to map separate inputs to theCanvas screens or the selected source is repeated in eachscreen of the Canvas.
8. Click OK.9. Click a MV 1 Follow button to have MultiViewer
1 mimic the current tile layout.
Note: The MultiViewer layout only follows the last layoutthat you generated (Layout Preset). Manually moving tilesaround is not followed in the MultiViewer. The MultiViewercan only mimic layouts that currently exist as MultiViewerlayouts.
To Set Up a Pre-Tiled SourceThe substitution table allows you to pre-assign whichinput goes to each tile/MiniME™ on a canvas.
You must set up your external source generator to outputa separate output for each screen of the Canvas layout.The bezel compensation and data doubling setting shouldbe set up on the source generator.1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Inputs > Substitutional.2. Click New.3. Click the Source button and select the source you
want to use to assign the pre-tiled sources to theMiniME™ outputs for the Canvas.
4. Click the ME button and select the MiniME™ thatyou want to assign a substitution source to.
5. Click the Substitution button and select thepre-tiled source for the MiniME™.
6. Click Save.7. Assign substitution sources to the each MiniME™
as required.
126 • MultiScreen — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
I/O ProcessorsThe Input/Output Video Processors are independent videoprocessing engines that allow you to perform FSFC andcolor correction functions on specific inputs or outputs.Once an I/O Processor has been assigned to an input oroutput, it can be used to frame sync, format convert, andcolor correct.The number of I/O Processors you have depends on theoptions installed. The switcher comes standard with 8 (2in UHDTV1) I/O Processors and is upgradable to 34 (8in UHDTV1).How I/O Processor are assigned depends on whether theswitcher is operating in SD/HD or UHDTV1.
To Assign an I/O Processor to anInput or Output (SD/HD Only)
When you don't have the CUF-ADD-I/OPLUS softwareoption activated, you must assign an I/O Processor to theinput or output you want to convert. Once assigned youcan turn on the FSFC and color correction for that video.The CUF-ADD-I/OPLUS option provides resources forevery input and output.
Note: This menu is not available when the Extra SD/HD I/OProcessor option is activated.
Note: In UHDTV1 you must assign individual FSFCs and colorcorrectors to inputs and outputs.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >Reference.
2. In the IO Processing Assignment area, click onthe IO Processor X button for the I/O Processoryou want to use.
3. Click the Assignment button to select the videoinput or output that you want to assign the I/OProcessor to.
Tip: Click Off to take the I/O Processor out of the videopath for the selected input or output.
Frame Sync and Format ConversionThe switcher has 8 frame synchronizer / format converter(FSFC) and input i-to-p converters that can be used toconvert video signals as well as correct mistimed, ordrifting, video input signal. The frame synchronizerscannot completely correct badly formatted video,mistimed switches, signal drops, or similar issues. Outputformat converters are only available on outputs 5-14.The total number of FSFCs can be increased to 24 (7 inUHDTV1) with the activation of the Extra SD/HD I/O
Processor option. An additional format converter (FC8)is also available with the option.Each FSFC channel maintains a separate setting fordifferent video formats. This lets you change betweenvideo formats without losing FSFC channelconfigurations.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with FrameSynchronizers and Format Converters:• If a video format not compatible with the currently
defined conversion is used, the video image is frozenwith the last successfully processed image frame.
• FSFCs create a one-frame delay in the video outputof the switcher for the video signal being converted.
• FSFCs strip embedded audio data from the videosignal. Ensure that no FSFC channels are assigned toany input or bus you are using with external audiomode.
• The SD/HD output format converters are onlyavailable on output BNCs 5 to 14.
• The FSFCs used in the switcher conform to theSMPTE ST 125:2013 standard. Some olderequipment may not fully conform to the currentstandards and can send out-of-spec video to theswitcher which can have unexpected results. Ensurethat video coming into the switcher conforms tocurrent standards, especially with regard to 480i videosignals with variable blanking sizes.
• An FSFC is required for Quad-Link 3Gb/s UHD-2SIinputs. You must assign an FSFC to the first input ofthe quad-link 3Gb/s UHD-2SI or UHD-QSD inputs.
• In UHDTV1 there are a maximum of 7 FSFCs plusa single FC (FC8).
Supported FSFC Video FormatsFSFCs can only convert between specific video formatsat a given frequency. The available conversions alsodepends on the switcher mode you are in. References to1080p 59.94Hz (A) and 1080p 50Hz (A) refer to 1080pLevel A only.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — I/O Processors • 127
Table 10: Supported FSFC Input and Output Formats
OutputSwitcherInput
UHDTV1 60Hz(Single 12Gb/sUHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 60HzUHDTV1 60Hz(Single 12Gb/sUHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 60Hz(Quad 3Gb/s UHD-2SI)3
UHDTV1 60Hz(Quad 3Gb/s UHD-QSD)3
720p 60Hz720p 60Hz
1080i 60Hz1080i 60Hz
1080p 60Hz (A)1080p 60Hz (A)
UHDTV1 59.94Hz(Single 12Gb/sUHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 59.94HzUHDTV1 59.94Hz(Single 12Gb/sUHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 59.94Hz(Quad 3Gb/s UHD-2SI)3
UHDTV1 59.94Hz(Quad 3Gb/s UHD-QSD)3
720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz
1080i 59.94Hz1080i 59.94Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)1080p 59.94Hz (A)
UHDTV1 50Hz(Single 12Gb/sUHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 50HzUHDTV1 50Hz(Single 12Gb/sUHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 50Hz(Quad 3Gb/s UHD-2SI)3
UHDTV1 50Hz(Quad 3Gb/s UHD-QSD)3
720p 50Hz720p 50Hz
1080i 50Hz1080i 50Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)1080p 50Hz (A)
1080p 60Hz (A)1080p 60Hz (A)1080p 60Hz (A)
1080i 60Hz1080i 60Hz
720p 60Hz720p 60Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)1080p 59.94Hz (A)1080p 59.94Hz (A)
1080i 59.94Hz1080i 59.94Hz1
720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)1080p 50Hz (A)1080p 50Hz (A)
1080i 50Hz1080i 50Hz1
720p 50Hz720p 50Hz
OutputSwitcherInput
1080p 29.97Hz1080p 29.97Hz1080p 29.97Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)2
1080p 25Hz1080p 25Hz1080p 25Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)2
1080pSF 29.97Hz1080pSF 29.97Hz41080pSF 29.97Hz
1080pSF 25Hz1080pSF 25Hz41080pSF 25Hz
1080pSF 23.98Hz1080pSF 23.98Hz41080pSF 23.98Hz
1080i 59.94Hz1080i 59.94Hz1080i 59.94Hz
1080p 59.94Hz1080p 59.94Hz (A)
720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz
480i 59.94Hz480i 59.94Hz
1080i 50Hz1080i 50Hz1080i 50Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)1080p 50Hz (A)
720p 50Hz720p 50Hz
576i 50Hz576i 50Hz
720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz720p 59.94Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)1080p 59.94Hz (A)
720p 50Hz720p 50Hz720p 50Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)1080p 50Hz (A)
576i 50Hz576i 50Hz576i 50Hz
1080p 50Hz (A)
1080i 50Hz1080i 50Hz
720p 50Hz
480i 59.94Hz480i 59.94Hz480i 59.94Hz
1080p 59.94Hz (A)
1080i 59.94Hz1080i 59.94Hz
720p 59.94Hz
Notes• 1 Converted using either a simple line-doubler or
4-line interpolater and may result in lower qualityvideo.
• 2 Converted by dropping frames and may result inlower quality video.
• 3 Only inputs 3-6 and 8-11 support Quad 3Gb/sUHDTV1 video.
• 4 Conversion is not supported when the switcher isoperating in this video format.
128 • I/O Processors — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Input FSFC
To Assign an FSFC to an Input (UHDTV1 Only)You must assign an FSFC to an input to convert the inputvideo. The CUF-ADD-I/OPLUS option providesadditional resources.1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Reference.2. In the Input FSFCAssignment area, click on the
Input FSFC X button for the FSFC you want touse.
Note: Input FC 8 can only be used to up-convert HD videosignals to UHDTV1. You cannot use this resource toframe-sync a UHDTV1 video signal.
3. Click the Input button to select the video input thatyou want to assign the FSFC to.
Tip: Click Off to take the FSFC out of the video path forthe selected input.
To Set Up an Input FSFC (SD/HD Only)In SD/HD, configure the FSFC that has been assignedto the input. The conversion that is available depends onthe format the switcher is operating in and the input thatis being converted.
Note: If you do not have the CUF-ADD-I/OPLUS optionactivated, an I/O Processor must be assigned to the input first.
Refer to Supported FSFC Video Formats on page 127for a list of compatible video format conversions.1. Press MENU > Config > Input > NEXT > NEXT
> NEXT > NEXT.2. Use the Input knob to select video input that has a
I/O Processor assigned to it and you want to applyan FSFC to.
3. Use the Type knob to turn on the FSFC for theselected video input.• SDI — no FSFC is applied to the input.• SDI-FS — an FSFC is applied to the input.• QuadFS — a timed FSFC is applied to the
input. Each QuadFS is timed to the first SDI-FSin the group of four (1-4, 5-8, 9-12). The SDI-FSmust be applied to the first input and QuadFS tothe rest of the inputs in the group.
Tip: Use this if you are taking the quad-split outputfrom an untimed UHD camera that you need toframe-sync. The frame syncs applied to each input arelocked together for timing so that all four inputs are insync.
4. Use the Frming knob to select the aspect ratioconversion mode you want to use.
The options that are available depend on the videoformat that the switcher is converting from and to.• Full — The video signal is scaled
disproportionately to fill the display of the newaspect ratio. Aspect distortion occurs as theimage is stretched/compressed to fit in the newaspect ratio.
• Zoom— The central portion of the video signalis zoomed to fill the display of the new videoformat. No aspect distortion is introduced butthe edges of the video signal may be cropped.
• LttrBx — Black bars are added to the top andbottom of a 16:9 image to display correctly in a4:3 video format.
• PllrBx — Black bars are added to the right andleft of a 4:3 image to display correctly in a 16:9video format.
5. Press the Frming knob.6. Press theConfrm knob to assign the FSFC channel.
To Set Up an Input FSFC (UHDTV1 Only)Set up the FSFC that has been assigned to the input. Theconversion that is available depends on the format theswitcher is operating in and the input that is beingconverted.
Note: You must assign an FSFC to the input before you canset it up.
Refer to Supported FSFC Video Formats on page 127for a list of compatible video format conversions.1. Press MENU > Config > Input > NEXT > NEXT
> NEXT > NEXT.2. Use the Input knob to select video input that has an
set up an FSFC for.3. Use the Scaler knob to turn on the FSFC for the
selected video input.• 12G-SDI— no conversion is applied to the input
(single-link 12Gb/s UHD-2SI).• 2SI(input 3 and 8 only) — the input is converted
from quad-link 3Gb/s UHD-2SI.• QSD(input 3 and 8 only) — the input is
converted from quad-link 3Gb/s UHD-QSD.• 1080p — the input is converted from 1080p.• 1080i — the input is converted from 1080i.• 720p — the input is converted from 720p.
4. Use the FrmSnc to apply a frame synchroniser tothe input (On) or not (Off).Note: Input FC 8 can only be used to up-convert HD videosignals to UHDTV1. You cannot use this resource toframe-sync a UHDTV1 video signal.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — I/O Processors • 129
Output FSFC
To Assign an FC to an Output (UHDTV1 Only)You must assign an format converter (FC) to an outputto convert the output video. The CUF-ADD-I/OPLUSoption provides additional resources.
Note: Only outputs 5 to 14 support output conversion.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >Reference.
2. In the Output FC Assignment area, click on theOutput FC X button for the FC you want to use.
3. Click the Output button to select the video outputthat you want to assign the FC to.
Tip: Click Off to take the FC out of the video path for theselected input.
To Set Up an Output FSFC (SD/HD)In SD/HD, an I/O Processor can be assigned as an FSFCto an output. If you do not have the CUF-ADD-I/OPLUSoption activated, an I/O Processor must be assigned tothe output first.
Refer to Supported FSFC Video Formats on page 127for a list of compatible video format conversions.
Note: Only outputs 5 to 14 support output FSFC conversion.
1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT> Output Config.
2. Use theOutput knob to select video output that youwant to convert.
3. Press NEXT.4. Use the Convrt knob to select the format you want
to feed out on the selected output.5. Use the Frming knob to select the aspect ratio
conversion mode you want to use.The options that are available depend on the videoformat that the switcher is converting from and to.• Full — The video signal is scaled
disproportionately to fill the display of the newaspect ratio. Aspect distortion occurs as theimage is stretched/compressed to fit in the newaspect ratio.
• Zoom— The central portion of the video signalis zoomed to fill the display of the new videoformat. No aspect distortion is introduced butthe edges of the video signal may be cropped.
• LttrBx — Black bars are added to the top andbottom of a 16:9 image to display correctly in a4:3 video format.
• PllrBx — Black bars are added to the right andleft of a 4:3 image to display correctly in a 16:9video format.
To Set Up an Output FC (UHDTV1)Set up the format converter (FC) that has been assignedto the output. The conversion that is available dependson the format the switcher is operating in and the inputthat is being converted.
Refer to Supported FSFC Video Formats on page 127for a list of compatible video format conversions.
Note: Only outputs 5 to 14 support output conversion.
1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT> Output Config.
2. Use theOutput knob to select video output that youwant to convert.
3. Press NEXT.4. Use the Convrt knob to select the format you want
to feed out on the selected output.• 12G-SDI — no conversion is applied to the
output (single-link 12Gb/s UHD-2SI).• 1080p — the output is converted to 1080p.• 1080i — the output is converted to 1080i.• 720p — the output is converted to 720p.
5. Use the Frming knob to select the aspect ratioconversion mode you want to use.The options that are available depend on the videoformat that the switcher is converting from and to.• Full — The video signal is scaled
disproportionately to fill the display of the newaspect ratio. Aspect distortion occurs as theimage is stretched/compressed to fit in the newaspect ratio.
• Zoom— The central portion of the video signalis zoomed to fill the display of the new videoformat. No aspect distortion is introduced butthe edges of the video signal may be cropped.
• LttrBx — Black bars are added to the top andbottom of a 16:9 image to display correctly in a4:3 video format.
• PllrBx — Black bars are added to the right andleft of a 4:3 image to display correctly in a 16:9video format.
Color CorrectionThe switcher has 8 color correctors (2 in UHDTV1) thatcan operate as Processing Amplifiers (Proc Amps) in theHSL (Y-Cr-Cb) color space or as RGB Color Correctorsin the RGB color space. Proc Amps and RGB Color
130 • I/O Processors — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Correctors apply color correction to video on input tothe switcher, before the crosspoint, and on the outputfrom the switcher. Correction applied to the input videois then available to all MEs. Output based correction isonly available on output BNCs 5 to 14.The total number of color correctors can be increased to34 (8 in UHDTV1) with the activation of the ExtraSD/HD I/O Processor option.Color correction is additive, allowing you to apply anycombination of Proc Amp and RGB Color Correctorbased adjustment to a video signal. If multiple colorcorrections are applied, the correction is applied first,and the bus-based correction is applied after that.
To Assign a Color Corrector to a Source(UHDTV1 Only)
You must assign a color corrector to an input or outputto correct the color of the video.1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Reference.2. In theProcAmp/Color Corrector Assignment
area, click on the PA/CC FSFC X button for thecolor corrector you want to use.
3. Click the Input/Output button to select the videosource that you want to assign the color correctorto.
Tip: Click Off to take the color corrector out of the videopath for the selected input.
Proc Amp Color CorrectionThe Proc Amp video correction allows you to adjust thegain, offset, black level, and gamma of the video signal.
To Apply a Proc Amp to a Video SourceA Processing Amplifier (Proc Amp) applies colorcorrection in the HSL (Y-Cr-Cb) color space for switchersources.1. Double-press the source button for the input video
source you want to apply the Proc Amp to.If a device is assigned to the video source, you mayhave to press NEXT to view the correct page.
Tip: If correction has already been applied (ON), pressReset to return the Proc Amp and Color Correctors to thedefault values.
2. Use the PrcAmp knob to select ON.3. Press the PrcAmp knob.4. Adjust the overall gain as follows:
a) Use the Cntrl knob to select Gain.
b) Use the Value knob to adjust the chrominanceand luminance gain together.
5. Adjust the chrominance gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select ChGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the chrominance
gain only.
6. Adjust the luminance gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select LmGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the luminance
gain only.
7. Adjust the hue rotation as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select HueRot.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the Hue.
Increasing the Hue Rotation turns the colorwheel clockwise, and decreasing the HueRotation turns the color wheelcounter-clockwise.
8. Adjust the black level as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select BlkLvl.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the black level.
Black level acts as a luminance offset.
9. Adjust the gamma value as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamVal.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the luminance
gamma value.
10. Adjust the gamma offset as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the luminance
gamma offset.
11. Adjust the Cr (red color difference) gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CrGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gain of the
Cr.
12. Adjust the Cr (red color difference) offset as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CrOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the offset of the
Cr.
13. Adjust the Cb (blue color difference) gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CbGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gain of the
Cb.
14. Adjust the Cb (blue color difference) offset asfollows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CbOff.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — I/O Processors • 131
b) Use the Value knob to adjust the offset of theCb.
To Apply a Proc Amp to a Video OutputA Processing Amplifier (Proc Amp) applies colorcorrection in the HSL (Y-Cr-Cb) color space for switchersources.
Note: Only outputs 5 to 14 support output color correction.
1. Press MENU > SYSTEM > NEXT > NEXT >NEXT > Output Config.
2. Use the Output knob to select the output that youwant to apply a proc amp to.
3. Press Prc/CC.
Tip: PressReset to return the color correction adjustmentsto default settings.
4. Use the PrcAmp knob to select ON and pressPrcAmp.
5. Adjust the overall gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select Gain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the chrominance
and luminance gain together.
6. Adjust the chrominance gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select ChGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the chrominance
gain only.
7. Adjust the luminance gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select LmGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the luminance
gain only.
8. Adjust the hue rotation as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select HueRot.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the Hue.
Increasing the Hue Rotation turns the colorwheel clockwise, and decreasing the HueRotation turns the color wheelcounter-clockwise.
9. Adjust the black level as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select BlkLvl.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the black level.
Black level acts as a luminance offset.
10. Adjust the gamma value as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamVal.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the luminance
gamma value.
11. Adjust the gamma offset as follows:
a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the luminance
gamma offset.
12. Adjust the Cr (red color difference) gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CrGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gain of the
Cr.
13. Adjust the Cr (red color difference) offset as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CrOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the offset of the
Cr.
14. Adjust the Cb (blue color difference) gain as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CbGain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gain of the
Cb.
15. Adjust the Cb (blue color difference) offset asfollows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select CbOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the offset of the
Cb.
RGB Color CorrectionThe RGB color correctors allow you to adjust the red,green, and blue component gain, offset, and gamma ofthe video signal.
To Apply a RGB Color Correction to a VideoSourceAn RGB Color Corrector applies color correction in theRGB color space for switcher sources.1. Double-press the source button for the input video
source you want to apply the RGB color correctorto.If a device is assigned to the video source, you mayhave to press NEXT to view the correct page.
Tip: If correction has already been applied (ON), pressReset to return the Proc Amp and Color Correction to thedefault values.
2. Use the ClrCor knob to select ON.3. Press the ClrCor knob.4. Use theColor knob to selectRGB or the individual
color component you want to adjust (Red, Green,Blue).
5. Adjust the gain of the selected color component(s)as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select Gain.
132 • I/O Processors — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gain of thecomponent(s).
6. Adjust the offset of the selected color component(s)as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select Offset.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the offset of the
component(s).
7. Adjust the lower offset of the selected colorcomponent(s) as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select LowOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the lower offset
of the component(s).
8. Adjust the gamma value of the selected colorcomponent(s) as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamVal.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gamma value
of the component(s).
9. Adjust the gamma offset of the selected colorcomponent(s) as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gamma offset
of the component(s).
To Apply a RGB Color Corrector to a VideoOutputAn I/O Processor can be assigned as an RGB colorcorrector to an output. An I/O Processor must be assignedto the output.
Note: Only outputs 5 to 14 support output color correction.
1. Press MENU > SYSTEM > NEXT > NEXT >NEXT > Output Config.
2. Use the Output knob to select the output that youwant to apply a RGB color corrector to.
3. Press Prc/CC.
Tip: PressReset to return the color correction adjustmentsto default settings.
4. Use the ClrCor knob to select ON and pressClrCor.
5. Use theColor knob to selectRGB or the individualcolor component you want to adjust (Red, Green,Blue).
6. Adjust the gain of the selected color component(s)as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select Gain.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gain of the
component(s).
7. Adjust the offset of the selected color component(s)as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select Offset.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the offset of the
component(s).
8. Adjust the lower offset of the selected colorcomponent(s) as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select LowOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the lower offset
of the component(s).
9. Adjust the gamma value of the selected colorcomponent(s) as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamVal.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gamma value
of the component(s).
10. Adjust the gamma offset of the selected colorcomponent(s) as follows:a) Use the Cntrl knob to select GamOff.b) Use the Value knob to adjust the gamma offset
of the component(s).
High Dynamic Range (HDR) and Wide ColorGamut (WCG) Conversion
The RGB color correctors are used to convert betweendifferent SDR and HDR ranges and between color gamuts(WCG).
Note: HDR and WCG input conversion can only be applied inUHDTV1 video mode.
Note: You must have available color correctors to be ableperform the HDR/WCG conversion.
Note: Media items must be created in the same color gamutand dynamic range that they are intended to be used in on theswitcher. If a media item is created in one color space and theswitcher is operating in another, the media item may not appearcorrectly.
HDR and WCG conversion can be applied on the fly toinput video signals or aux bus outputs.To configure the dynamic range and color gamutconversion of input sources you must apply a colorcorrector to the input. This will convert the input sourceto the format that the switcher is operating in. Videosignals can again be converted for individual outputBNCs.Supported Color Gamuts:• BT.709 — color gamut recommended for HD video
signals.• BT.2020 — wide color gamut recommended for
UHDTV1 video signals.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — I/O Processors • 133
Supported Dynamic Ranges• SDR — Standard Dynamic Range.• HLG — Hybrid Log Gamma.• PQ — Perceptual Quantizer.• S-Log3 — Sony® S-Log3.
Supported HDR and WCG ConversionThe switcher supports both dynamic range and colorgamut conversion.
Note: Round trip color conversion is not recommended.Converting a source from BT.709 to BT.2020 and then back toBT.709 will not precisely reproduce the original image colorsagain.
Note: The switcher uses the color correctors for conversion.
Table 11: Supported HDR/Color Gamut Conversion
Supported ConversionsInput
HLG BT.709SDR BT.709
PQ BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
SDR BT.709HLG BT.709
PQ BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
SDR BT.709PQ BT.709
HLG BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
Supported ConversionsInput
SDR BT.709S-Log3 BT.709
HLG BT.709
PQ BT.709
SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
SDR BT.709SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.709
PQ BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
HLG BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
SDR BT.709HLG BT.2020
HLG BT.709
PQ BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
SDR BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
SDR BT.709PQ BT.2020
HLG BT.709
PQ BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.2020
S-Log3 BT.2020
SDR BT.709S-Log3 BT.2020
HLG BT.709
PQ BT.709
S-Log3 BT.709
SDR BT.2020
HLG BT.2020
PQ BT.2020
134 • I/O Processors — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
To Set the Switcher Dynamic Range and ColorGamutTo properly convert input and output video sources youmust set the color gamut and dynamic range that theswitcher is operating in. These are the dynamic rangeand color gamut settings that inputs are converted to andoutputs are converted from.
Note: The switcher must be operating in the UHDTV1 videomode for dynamic range and color gamut conversion.
1. Press MENU > Ref > NEXT.2. Use theDynRng knob to select the range you want
the switcher to operate in.• SDR — Standard Dynamic Range.• HLG — Hybrid Log Gamma.• PQ — Perceptual Quantizer.• SLOG3 — Sony® S-Log3.
3. Use the Gamut knob to select the color gamut youwant the switcher to operate in.• 709 — BT.709 color gamut recommended for
HD video signals.• 2020 — BT.2020 wide color gamut
recommended for UHDTV1 video signals.
To Set the Video Input Dynamic Range andColorGamutYou must assign the dynamic range and color gamut ofinput video for that source to be converted.
Note: You must assign a color corrector to the input to be ableto convert it.
1. Press MENU > Config > Input.2. Use the Input knob to select the video input that
needs to be converted.3. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.4. Use the DynRng knob to select the dynamic range
of the input video signal.• SDR — Standard Dynamic Range.• HLG — Hybrid Log Gamma.• PQ — Perceptual Quantizer.• SLOG3 — Sony® S-Log3.
5. Use the Gamut knob to select the color gamut ofthe input video signal.• 709 — BT.709 color gamut recommended for
HD video signals.• 2020 — BT.2020 wide color gamut
recommended for UHDTV1 video signals.
To Set the Video Output Dynamic Range andColor GamutYou must assign the dynamic range and color gamut ofoutput video for that source to be converted.
Note: You must assign a color corrector to the output to be ableto convert it.
1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT> Output Config.
2. Use theOutput knob to select the video output thatneeds to be converted.
3. Click NEXT > NEXT.4. Use the DynRng knob to select the dynamic range
for the output video signal.• SDR — Standard Dynamic Range.• HLG — Hybrid Log Gamma.• PQ — Perceptual Quantizer.• SLOG3 — Sony® S-Log3.
5. Use the Gamut knob to select the color gamut forthe output video signal.• 709 — BT.709 color gamut recommended for
HD video signals.• 2020 — BT.2020 wide color gamut
recommended for UHDTV1 video signals.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — I/O Processors • 135
Switcher PersonalityThere are a number of settings for how the switcher willreact to different situations, or how switcher elementsappear to the operator. All these settings are groupedtogether into the Switcher Personality. These settingsinclude double-press rates and sleep time, among others.
Auto Remove KeyYou can have a key removed from the Next Transitionarea, so that it is not included in the next transition, afterit has been transitioned off-air using the KEY X CUT orKEY X AUTO buttons. This allows you to transition akey off-air in an emergency and not have it accidentallytransitioned back on-air with the next transition from theTransition Area.
To Set the Auto Remove Key Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
Trans Area.2. Use the RemKey knob to select whether a key
remains selected in the Next Transition Area (Off)after a KEY X CUT or KEY X AUTO transitionsthe key off-air, or is removed from the NextTransition Area (On).
Auto Trans Second PressWhen you press the AUTO TRANS or KEY AUTObutton during a transition, the switcher can be set to eitherhalt the transition (the transition freezes on-air) and waitfor the button to be pressed again, immediately reverse,or immediately cut the transition back to the initial state.When the transition is halted, pressing the AUTOTRANS, or KEY AUTO, button again can be set toeither continue the transition, or reverse the transitionback to the initial state.
To Set the Auto Trans Second Press Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
Trans Area > NEXT.2. Use theMAuto 2, orKAuto 2, knob to select what
happens when the AUTO TRANS, or a KEYAUTO, button is pressed during a transition.• HltFwd — the transition is halted and then
continues in the same direction when thetransition button is pressed again
• HltRev — the transition is halted and thenreverses directions when the transition button ispressed again
• Rev — the transition immediately reversesdirections when the transition button is pressed
• Cut — the transition immediately cuts back tothe initial state when the transition button ispressed
• Ignore — the button press is ignored by theswitcher and the transition continues
Background Double-PressThe Background Double-Press feature allows you to havea double-press of the BKGD button on a TransitionModule select background and all on-air keyers as partof the next transition.
To Set the Background Double-Press Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
Trans Area > NEXT > NEXT.2. Use the BGDDbl knob select how you want
double-press the BKGD button on the transition areato behave.• Ignore — ignore the on-air keyers• TrsClr— include all on-air keyers with the next
transition
Color SchemesThe buttons on the control panel can be set to glow withdifferent colors. This color can be picked from a list ofpre-set color schemes, or a custom color can be selected.Up to four (4) custom color schemes can be saved on theswitcher.
Note: Only a physical control panel supports button colorschemes.
To Use a Unique Color for Each KeyerThe Key buttons can use the same color as the ME, or aunique color for each keyer.1. Press MENU > User > Scheme > NEXT.2. Use the KeyCol knob to select whether the buttons
for each keyer are assigned a unique color (On), orif the keyer buttons all use the same color (Off).Depending on the color scheme selected, key 1 isyellow, key 2 is green, key 3 is blue, and key 4 ispurple.
Tip: You can adjust the color of the keyer and save it to acustom color scheme.
3. Press Next.4. Use the Adjust knob to select the key (KeyX) you
want to set the color for.
136 • Switcher Personality — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
5. Press Next.6. Use the Hue, Sat, and Lum knobs to select the
custom color you want to use.7. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.8. Use theSave knob to select the custom scheme that
you want to store the custom colors to.9. Press the Save knob.10. Press the Confrm knob.
To Select a Panel Color SchemeThe color scheme sets the glow color for the buttons onthe control panel.1. Press MENU > User > Scheme.2. Use the Load knob to select the color scheme you
want to use.If you have created custom color schemes, theyappear in the list as well.
3. Press the Load knob.4. Press the Confrm knob.
To Create a Custom Panel Color SchemeCustom colors are created using standard hue, saturation,and luminance values. Once created, you can save yourcustom color.1. Press MENU > User > Scheme > NEXT.2. Use the Adjust knob to select which set of buttons
you are adjusting the color for.3. Press Next.4. Use the Hue, Sat, and Lum knobs to select the
custom color you want to use.5. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.6. Use theSave knob to select the custom scheme that
you want to store the custom colors to.7. Press the Save knob.8. Press the Confrm knob.
To Set the Brightness of the Control PanelButtons
Note: Brightness is not stored with the color scheme.
1. PressMENU >User >Scheme >NEXT >NEXT> NEXT.
2. Use the Brightness knob to set the brightness ofthe buttons on the control panel.
Double-Press RateYou can set the double-press rate of the switcher to suityour preference. Setting a fast rate requires you todouble-press the knobs in quick succession in order tobe recognized as a double-press. Setting a slow rateallows more time between presses but may register twosingle presses as a double-press.
To Set the Double-Press Rate1. Press MENU > Pers > DblPrs Speed.2. Double-press the HERE knob at the rate you want
to use for double-pressed on the switcher.3. Press MENU to store the new rate.
Editor ModeThe switcher can be controlled by an external editor. Theexternal editor can control the switcher to performtransitions, or recall memories, among the supportedcommands.Refer to the GVG100 Supported Protocol Document fora list of supported commands.
To Set the Switcher to Editor ModeTip: You can quickly turn off editor mode by pressing andholding the MENU button and pressing PERS.
1. Press MENU > Pers.2. Use the Editor knob to select On to allow the
switcher to be controlled by an external editor.
Memory Bank Button BehaviorNote: Not available on the CB1 and CB2.
The Memory Bank Button Behavior feature allows youto set how the BANK button behaves when pressed andreleased.
To Set the Bank Button Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT.2. Use the MemBnk knob to select how you want the
BANK button to behave when pressed and released.• Normal — the keypad is used to enter the bank
number directly, followed by the memory (Forexample, to access memory 3 on bank 2, pressBANK > 2 > 3.)
• Legacy — the next bank is selected every timethe button is pressed, cycling through all banks(For example, to access bank 5, press BANKrepeatedly until bank 5 is selected.)
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Switcher Personality • 137
ME SelectNote: Only available on a single row panel.
The ME Select feature allows you to have the switcherautomatically select the ME, MiniME™ etc. that isassigned to the panel when storing or recalling memorieson the control panel.
To Set the ME Select Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > Next.2. Use the MESel knob to select where memories are
stored and recalled.• Hold— you must select the ME, MiniME™ etc.
that you want to store or recall a memory on.• Follow — the memory is stored or recalled on
the ME, MiniME™ etc. that the panel row iscurrently assigned to.
Next Button Secondary FunctionYou can configure the NEXT button to allow you tomanually trigger GPI outputs. This allows you to use theGPI to manually roll a clip on a video server, or load thenext page on a character generator. Refer to the ExternalDevice Setup Sheets for more information on setting upan using external devices.Refer to GPI Control on page 142 for more informationon setting up and using GPIs.
To Set the NEXT Button Secondary Function1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
NextBn Func2.2. Use the Func knob to select the second function of
the Next button.• <none> — no secondary function• GPO — you can manually trigger a GPI output
Next Transition ResetYou can have the transition area reset to a defaultbackground dissolve after each transition. This allowsyou to prevent the selections from the last transition frombeing accidentally included with the next transition.
To Set the Next Transition Reset Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
Trans Area.2. Use the Trans knob to select whether the transition
area is reset after a transition.• NotRst — area is not changed after a transition
• Reset — area is reset to a background dissolveafter each transition
Next Transition ToggleYou can set the next transition selection buttons to eitherbe latching (toggle) or momentary (off). When in togglemode, pressing one of the next trans buttons (BKGD,KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, KEY 4) toggles it on or off(unless it is the last button - at least one must be selected).When off, pressing one button deselects all other buttons.You must press all the buttons you want to include in thenext transition simultaneously.
To Set the Next Trans Toggle1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > Toggle.2. Use the NTrans knob to select whether the next
transition buttons are latching (Toggle) ormomentary (Off).• Toggle — when you press a next transition
button it toggles on or off and does not changethe other buttons.
• Off — when you press a next transition buttonit selects that button and turns off all otherbuttons. You must press the buttons at the sametime to select them as part of the next transition.
Power-Save ModeThe switcher goes into a Power-Save mode after auser-defined amount of time (20 minutes by default)without user interaction. Touching any button, knob, orfader will wake the switcher. The switcher does not acton the button, knob, or fader control that wakes it fromsleep mode.During Power-Save mode, video related hardware is notaffected and video signals still pass through the switcher.
To Set the Power Save Mode and Timer1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.2. Press the Sleep/PwrSve knob to toggle between
the power save modes.• Sleep — displays are turned off and buttons
light in raindrop pattern• PwrSve — all buttons and displays are turned
off and as much power is conserved as possible
3. Use the Sleep/PwrSve knob to set the amount oftime that the switcher will wait without user inputbefore going into sleep or power-save mode. Settingthe value to off prevents the switcher from evergoing into sleep or power-save mode.
138 • Switcher Personality — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Roll GPO/Roll ClipThe switcher uses a GPI output to start a clip playing onan external video server. This can be set to have the GPIoutput always trigger if a source going on-air is from avideo server, or you have to set the GPI output to triggermanually.If your external video server supports the AMP protocol,the roll clip functionality works directly without the useof a GPI output.
To Set the Roll GPO/Clip Behavior1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
Trans Area > NEXT > NEXT.2. Use the RlClip knob to select whether GPI outputs,
or video servers, assigned to input sources aretriggered before a transition.• Force — the GPI output, or video server, is
always triggered with the transition• User — you must select to trigger the GPI, or
video server, output with the transition
Shift ToggleYou can set the Shift button on the bus map to be eitherlatching (toggle) or momentary (off). When in togglemode, you can press the shift button and then select asource on the shifted bus without having to hold downthe shift button. This only affects the bus the shift buttonis on.
To Set the Shift Toggle1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > Toggle.2. Use theShift knob to select whether the shift button
is latching (Toggle) or momentary (Off).• Toggle — when you press the Shift button it
stays on until you press a source button on thatbus.
• Off — the Shift button only stays on as long asyou are holding it down.
Transition Rate UnitsWhen you perform an auto transition, you must specifythe length of time that you want the transition to take.This value can be entered either in video frames orseconds, depending on what you are most comfortablewith.
To Set the Units Used for Transition Rates1. Press MENU > Pers.
2. Use theRate knob to select either frames (Frames)or seconds (Secnds) as the units you want to usefor transition rates.
Undo Memory RecallThe memory recall undo feature can be turned on or off.A memory recall is undone by pressing the memorynumber a second time after a memory is recalled.The undo memory functionality can be set independentlyfor the main memory system and the Effects Memoryarea.
To Turn Undo Memory Recall Off1. Press MENU > Pers > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT >
NEXT.2. Use the GMUndo knob to turn the undo feature on
(On) or off (Off) for the main memory system.3. Use the MEUndo knob to turn the undo feature on
(On) or off (Off) for the effects memory modules,if your control panel has them.
User ButtonsThese buttons can be assigned as ME, Aux Bus,MiniME™, Canvas, or chroma key selection buttons. Thenumber and position of the buttons on the control paneldepend on the model of your control panel.If a button is assigned to an ME, aux bus, MiniME™,Canvas, or chroma key, you can press and hold the buttonto be able to select a different ME, aux bus, MiniME™,Canvas, or chroma key from the key bus. If the userbutton is assigned to an Aux, it will allow you to selecta different Aux.
To Set A User Button1. Press MENU > User > NEXT > UseSel Buttns.2. Use the Button/RowBtn knob to select the user
button you want to set up.3. Use theType and Index knobs to select the function
for the user button.• None — user button is not assigned• ME — use the Index knob to select which ME
the user button is assigned to• Aux— use the Index knob to select which Aux
Bus the user button is assigned to• MiniME — use the Index knob to select which
MiniME™ the user button is assigned to• Canvas — use the Index knob to select which
Canvas the user button is assigned to
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Switcher Personality • 139
• Key — use the Index knob to select whichkeyer the user button is assigned to. SelectSelect if you want to be able to press and holdthe user button and select the keyer you want thebus assigned to. For example, press and hold thekey select user button and press source button 2on the key bus to assign the key bus to key 2.The source button for the keyer that the bus iscurrently assigned to is selected.
Tip: Each keyer can have a different button color tohelp identify it. You can turn this feature on or off fromthe Schemes menu.
• CCBank — use the knob to select whichcustom control bank the user button is assignedto. Select Select if you want to be able to pressand hold the user button and select the customcontrol bank on the key bus.
140 • Switcher Personality — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Software OptionsFeatures like the number of MEs, I/O Processors, andMultiViewers can be licensed for your switcher. Theseoptions can either be licensed at the time you purchaseyour switcher, or installed later on.None of these options require additional hardware.
To Add a Software OptionThe license menu lists the options that are installed, aswell as allows you to copy and paste codes for installingnew options.1. Contact your Ross Video sales representative, or to
purchase a license for the option you want to install.• CUF-ADD-ME2 — add second SD/HD ME.• CUF-ADD-ME3 — add third SD/HD ME.• CUF-UHD-ADD-ME1 — add first UHDTV1
ME.• CUF-UHD-ADD-ME2— add second UHDTV1
ME.• CUF-ADD-I/OPLUS — upgrade to 34 SD/HD
I/O Processors• CUF-UHD-ADD-I/OPLUS — upgrade to 7
UHDTV1 input FSFCs and 4 output FCs.• CUF-ADD-MV2&4— add I/O MultiViewer to
output 2 and Video Processor MultiVieweroutput 4.
• CUF-UHD-ADD-MV — add I/O MultiViewerto output 1.
Tip: You can also email ([email protected]) or call(+1-613-652-4886) for sales options.
2. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >System > Licenses.
3. Click the Request Code Copy button for theoption type(s) you have purchased.
4. Send the Request Codes to the Ross Video contactyou were given when you purchased the options andthey will send you theLicenseKeys for the options.
5. Click the License Key Paste button to paste thekey into the field.
6. Click Apply.When the keys are accepted a green check-markappears next to the line.
7. Power cycle the frame by switching the power buttonOff and then On again.The switcher will come up with the new softwareoptions activated.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Software Options • 141
GPI ControlGeneral Purpose Interface (GPI) is a high/low voltagesignalling protocol that allows the switcher to send simplecommands to an external device, or receive commandsfrom a device. Each pin on the GPI is set as either high(+5 Volts), or low (0 Volts), and it is the switchingbetween high and low that sends commands to theexternal device, or to the switcher.
GPI Trigger TypesThere are four trigger types supported by the switcher.These can be either output triggers, or input triggers.
Table 12: Trigger Types
DescriptionTrigger
Trig
ger
Duration
The output level is set high,and momentarily goes low for
the trigger.
LowEdge
Trig
ger
DurationThe output level is set low, andmomentarily goes high for the
trigger.
HighEdge
Trig
ger
The output level toggles fromthe base high level to the low
level. The output signalremains at this level until reset.
LowLevel
Trig
ger
<image audience="print" href="EffDiss.png" align="center" placement="break" scale="100"/>
The output toggles from thebase low level to the high level.The output signal remains at
this level until reset.
HighLevel
GPI SetupEach GPI pin on the switcher can be configured as eitheran input, or an output. By default, all GPIs are set asinputs.
To Set Up a GPI InputThe switcher requires a Low Edge GPI input trigger.1. Press MENU > Config > GPIO.2. Use the GPIO knob to select the GPI that you want
to configure as an input.3. Use the Type, or I/O, knob to select GPI.4. Press the Edit knob.
5. Use the Event knob to select the action you wantto assign to the selected GPI input pin.• <none> — no action is taken• CC — run a specific custom control
• use the Prop knob to select Bank and theValue knob to select the custom control bank
• use the Prop knob to select CC and theValue knob to select the custom control
• MemRcl — recall a memory on all MEs (usethe Value knob to select the memory to recall)
• FtB — perform a transition to black on theprogram ME that also takes all keys off-air. Thesource originally selected on program is selectedon preset
• MCut — perform a background cut on theselected ME (use the Value knob to select theME, MiniME™, or Canvas)
• MAuto— perform a background auto transitionon the selected ME (use theValue knob to selectthe ME, MiniME™, or Canvas)
• KCut — perform a key cut on the selected MEand Key• use the Prop knob to select ME and the
Value knob to select the ME, MiniME™, orCanvas
• use the Prop knob to select Keyer and theValue knob to select the keyer
• KAuto — perform a key auto transition on theselected ME, MiniME™, or Canvas and Key• use the Prop knob to select ME and the
Value knob to select the ME, MiniME™, orCanvas
• use the Prop knob to select Keyer and theValue knob to select the keyer number
• AuxXpt — select a video source on an aux bus• use the Prop knob to select Aux and the
Value knob to select the aux bus• use the Prop knob to select Input and the
Value knob to select the video source
To Set Up a GPI OutputA GPI output can be set as a Normal GPI output, or asa Tally output. As a tally output, the GPI output must beassigned to a video source. A GPI output in tally modecan still be used as a normal GPI output.1. Press MENU > Config > GPIO.2. Use the GPIO knob to select the GPI pin that you
want to configure as an output.
142 • GPI Control — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
3. Use the Type (or I/O) knob to select the type oftrigger signal you want to use for the GPI output.• LowE – low edge trigger• HighE – high edge trigger• LowL – low level trigger• HighL – high level trigger
4. For edge triggers, use theDur knob to set the lengthof time (in frames) that the GPI edge output remainstriggered.
5. For level triggers, use the Mode knob to set howyou want to GPI output to act.• Normal— when assigned to a video source and
RollClip is active, will trigger with the sourcegoing on-air, and back with the source goingoff-air (pre-delay values are only used when thesource is going on-air)
• Tally — when assigned to a video source, willtrigger with the source going on-air, and backwith the source going off-air (RollClip andpre-delay values are ignored)
GPI Output TriggersEach video source can have a GPI output assigned to it.This GPI can be used to trigger an external device, suchas a video server, to play the cued clip when the videosources from the video server are taken on-air. Thistrigger can be set up to occur automatically any time thevideo source is transitioned on-air, or it can be triggeredmanually.An automatic GPI output trigger can be overridden ifrequired.
Note: The Next Button Secondary Function must be set to GPOto be able to trigger a GPI output manually using the NEXTbutton.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working with GPIoutput triggers:• The RlClip knob must be set to On to trigger a GPI
output with a transition.• Edge triggered GPI outputs remain triggered for the
configured duration.• Level triggered GPI outputs toggle between high and
low each time they are triggered.
To Assign a GPI Output to a Video SourceYou can set a pre-delay, or pre-roll, that will specifywhen the GPI is triggered in relation to taking the videosource on-air. This is useful for VTR pre-roll delay and
other situations where an input source is not immediatelyready to be taken to air.
The RlClip knob must be set to On to trigger the GPIoutput with the transition.
Note: You cannot assign a GPI output to Aux bus specialsources (AUX PGM, AUX PV, AUX CLN).
1. Press MENU > Config > Input > NEXT > NEXT> NEXT.
2. Use the Input knob to select the video source thatyou want to assign a GPI output to.When you select this source on a bus, the GPI outputwill trigger automatically.
Note: Not all sources can have a GPI assigned to them.
3. Use theGPO knob to select the GPI output that youwant to assign to the selected video source.
4. Use thePredly knob to select the pre-delay interval(in frames) that the switcher waits after the GPIoutput is triggered before taking the input sourceon-air.
To Set a GPI to Be Triggered ManuallyTo manually trigger a GPI output, the GPI must beassigned to one of the pattern/mnemonic buttons.1. Press MENU > Config > GPIO > NEXT.2. Use the Bttn knob to select the pattern/mnemonic
button that you want to assign a GPI output to.3. Use theGPO knob to select the GPI output that you
want to assign to the button.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — GPI Control • 143
Live Edit Decision ListsEdit Decision Lists are files used by non-linear editing(NLE) suites to aid in post-production. Your switchercan capture EDL data in a file that you load into yourNLE suite.
LiveEDL SetupYou can configure your switcher to trigger multiple GPIoutputs at the start, end, or both, of an EDL data captureto trigger video servers that are recording the feedscoming into the switcher. The EDL data from theswitcher can then be paired with the feeds from the videoservers, using the timecode data, in the NLE suite to editor re-cut the show.You can also set a pre-delay for each GPI output. EDLdata capture does not begin until the highest pre-delayhas passed. This is useful when the switcher needs towait for external equipment to become ready. Theexample below shows the effects of various triggeringand pre-delay settings.
To Set the LiveEDL Behavior1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT
> LivEDL Config.2. Use the GPO knob to select the GPI output that is
connected to your video server.The GPI must be configured as a GPI output beforeit can be selected.
3. Use the Triggr knob to select when the GPI outputis triggered.• Off — GPI is not triggered• Start— GPI output is triggered at the beginning
of the EDL capture• Stop— GPI output is triggered at the end of the
EDL capture• Both— GPI output is triggered at the beginning
and end of the EDL captureIf Start or Both is selected, you must set thepre-delay for the GPI.
4. Use thePreDly knob to select the pre-delay interval(in frames) that the switcher waits after the GPIoutput is triggered before starting to capture EDLdata.
Timecode SetupThe switcher uses timecode data to mark the EDL fileso that it can be used in the non-linear editing suite alongwith the feeds from the video servers. The timecode data
can be either from an external timecode generator, orinternally generated. An offset can be applied to bothtimecode sources.For an external timecode, an LTC generator must beconnected to the LTC port on the back of the frame.
To Confirm External LTC SignalIf you have an external linear timecode generatorconnected to the switcher, you can confirm that theswitcher is receiving timecode data.1. Press MENU > Status > NEXT.2. Confirm that the timecode information shown on
the display matches the timecode from the timecodegenerator.
If required, an offset can be applied to the incomingtimecode data.
To Set Up Communications with a TSC-99021. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT >
Device Config.2. Press the Add knob.3. Use the Slot knob to select SP (serial port).4. Use the Type knob to select LTC.5. Press NEXT.6. Use the SubType knob to select LTC_#.#.7. Press the SubType knob.8. Press the Confrm knob to save your settings.
To Set the LTC Timecode SourceIf you are using an external timecode generator, an offset,or delay, is applied to the incoming timecode signalbefore it is stored in the LiveEDL data file. If you areusing an internal timecode, the offset is the starting timethat the switcher uses for the timecode that is stored inthe LiveEDL file.
Note: If a valid timecode signal is detected on the LTC port onthe frame, the external timecode will be used even if an internaltimecode is set.
1. PressMENU >System >NEXT>NEXT>NEXT> LivEDL Config > NEXT.
2. Use the Offset knob to select the source of thetimecode data you want to use.• Ext. — the timecode data received on the LTC
port is used• Int. — an internal timecode is generated
3. Set the timecode offset for an External timecode asfollows:
144 • Live Edit Decision Lists — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
a) Use the LTCOff knob to select the offset, inframes, that you want to delay the incomingtimecode signal by.
4. Set the starting time for an Internal timecode asfollows:a) Use the Field knob to select the hours, minutes,
or seconds that you want to adjust.The timecode is shown in the [HH:MM:SS]format.
b) Use the Value knob to set the starting time inthe selected field.
LiveEDL Data CaptureCapturing EDL data is manually started and stopped fromthe switcher. When you select to start capturing EDLdata, and GPI outputs set to trigger on start are triggered.If a pre-delay has been set for the GPIs, the switcher doesnot start capturing EDL data until the pre-delay time hasfinished.When you stop capturing EDL data, you have the optionto delete the data, or save it to a USB drive. You can alsoconnect to the switcher via FTP and download the filesdirectly to your editing suite. Use the usernameliveedl and password password to create the FTPconnection to the switcher.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when reviewing the EDLdata from the switcher:• When a MediaWipe is selected as the transition type,
the switcher records the transition duration as the cutpoint frame multiplied by two (2). This is to ensurethat the cut point is recorded accurately.
• If you used more than one ME, or Aux bus, in yourshot, a separate EDL file is saved for each ME andAux bus. The ME re-entry is shown as being selectedon the first ME, and the source selections on thesecond ME are saved to the separate LiveEDL file.Aux bus information is only stored to a LiveEDL filewhen the Aux bus is not in fixed mode.
To Start Capturing EDL DataThe EDL data can be stored to one of 1000 LiveEDLfiles stored on the switcher. A separate file is created foreach ME when the additional MEs are used.1. Press MENU > User > LivEDL.2. Use the Start knob to select the LiveEDL file on
the switcher that you want to store the EDL data to.
If the LiveEDL file already contains data, you aregiven the option to delete the data, or save it to aUSB.
3. Press the Start knob to start recording.
To Stop Capturing and Save EDL Data1. Press MENU > User > LivEDL.2. Press the Stop knob to stop recording.3. Save the EDL data to a USB as follows:
a) Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on theswitcher. You must wait 5 seconds for theswitcher to recognise the USB drive.
b) Press the Save knob.c) Press the Confrm knob to store the LiveEDL
file to the USB drive.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Live Edit Decision Lists • 145
MultiPanelEach frame can be controlled by up to three (3) controlpanels at the same time. These panels can be of differentsizes and can be assigned different ME resources andhave independent personality settings. Panel personalitysettings are a subset of the full personality settings of theswitcher.
Keep the following in mind:Keep the following in mind when working withMultiPanel:• The assignment of the panel ID is done from the
Carbonite Black control panel.• Control panel specific personality settings are stored
on the frame for the panel ID and are not tied to thecontrol panel.
• DashBoard automatically follows the master panelbut will ignore permissions set for the master panel.
• If you change switcher modes, the MultiPanelpermissions may have to be set again.
• An undo of a memory recall ignores panelpermissions and will undo the last memory recalledfrom any panel.
• Bus maps are specific to each control panel. Creatingor updating a bus map for one control panel does notchange the bus map on another control panel.
• Custom controls ignore control panel permissionsand will run events on an ME, MiniME™, or Canvasthat the control panel does not have permission for.
To Set Up MultiPanel Permissions1. Press MENU > Config > NEXT > NEXT >
MultiPanel.2. Use thePnlID knob to select the panel that you want
to set the permissions for.3. Use the ME and State knobs to select which ME
(ME), MiniME™ (MinME), Canvas (Can), andchroma key (CK) resources that selected panel cancontrol.
Note: A control panel must have permission to at least oneME, MiniME™, or Canvas.
146 • MultiPanel — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Diagnostics and CalibrationThere are a number of calibration and diagnostics toolsin the switcher that can be used to troubleshoot problemswith your switcher.
Note: If you are having problems with your switcher, pleasecontact Ross Video Technical Support for assistance.
Switcher Information and LogsSwitcher information and logs can be used to identifyand diagnose problems with the switcher. Use thisinformation when contacting Ross Video TechnicalSupport.
Switcher StatusThe Status node provides a read only overview of thestate of a number of important switcher components andequipment.The following items are available on the Status node:• Software Version — the current version of the
software running on the switcher• Serial Number — the serial number of the frame• Engine Type — the model of frame• Switcher Mode — the current mode the switcher is
operating in• Video Mode — the video format that the switcher is
operating in• Video Reference Source — the source of video
reference to the switcher• External Reference — the video format of the
external reference, if connected• Reference — status of whether the switcher has
locked to the reference format• Field Dominance — the switching field• Ancillary Mode — how ancillary data is handled
(strip or pass)• Timecode— the current timecode being received by
the switcher• RossTalk Server Port — the network port that the
switcher is listening on for RossTalk commands.• TSL UMD Server Port — the network port that the
switcher is listening on for TSL UMD commands.• Temperature — status of the ambient temperature
in the frame• CPU Temperature (C) — the temperature of the
frame CPU in degrees Celsius• VP FPGA Temperature (C) — the temperature of
the frame video processor FPGA in degrees Celsius
• IO FPGA Temperature (C) — the temperature ofthe frame I/O processor FPGA in degrees Celsius
• Fan 1 Speed— speed and status of fan 1 in the frame• Fan 2 Speed— speed and status of fan 2 in the frame• Fan 3 Speed— speed and status of fan 3 in the frame• Power Supply 1 — is power supply 1 connected to
a power source• Power Supply 2 — is power supply 2 connected to
a power source• Allocated DVEs — where DVE channels are
allocated in the switcher.
To View the Software Version• Press MENU > Status.
The current software version (SW Ver) and referenceformat are displayed.
To Copy Logs To a USBSwitcher logs can be stored onto a USB to be sent totechnical support to diagnose problems with yourswitcher.
Note: Logs must be copied before a reboot or power-cycle ofthe switcher, or the information in them will be lost.
1. Insert USB drive into the USB port on the frame orcontrol panel. Wait 5 seconds after inserting the USBdrive before using it.
2. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > DiagTests.
3. Press NEXT > Copy Logs.4. Press Frame or Panel to copy the logs file to the
USB drive installed into the frame or control panel.
The logs have been copied into the \switcherdirectory on the USB drive.
CalibrationCalibration allows you to reset the limits of the faderson the control panel and re-center the positioner.
To Calibrate the Switcher1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > NEXT > Calib Reset.2. Move the positioner backwards and forwards, left
to right, and twist the positioner left and right a fewtimes.
3. Move each fader from one limit to the next a fewtimes. Do not push the fader hard when it reachesthe limit.
4. Press MENU to save the calibration information.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Diagnostics and Calibration • 147
System Real-Time Clock/DateThe switcher uses an internal clock to generate the timefor the clock overlay for the MultiViewer.
To Set the System Real-Time Clock1. Press MENU > Config > NEXT > Clock.2. Press Edit below the time.3. Use theHour,Minute, andSecond knobs to select
the current time.4. Press Hour.5. Press Confrm.
To Set the System Date1. Press MENU > Config > NEXT > Clock.2. Press Edit below the date.3. Use the Month, Day, and Year knobs to select the
current date.4. Press Month.5. Press Confrm.
DiagnosticsDiagnostics consist of a number of tests that are used toconfirm the functionality of switcher components.
Frame DIP SwitchesThere are a number of DIP switches inside the frame thatare used to diagnose the operation of the switcher.
Table 13: Ultra Frame DIP Switches
DescriptionDIP
This DIP switch is used to set the IP addressof ethernet port on the frame to the defaultvalue (192.168.0.123). It must be in the up (off)position to set another IP address for the frame.
1
This DIP switch is unused and should be left inthe default up (off) position.
2
This DIP switch is unused and should be left inthe default up (off) position.
3
This DIP switch prevents software upgrades.It must be in the up (off) position to upgrade theswitcher.
4
This DIP switch is unused and should be left inthe default up (off) position.
5
This DIP switch is unused and should be left inthe default up (off) position.
6
This DIP switch is unused and should be left inthe default up (off) position.
7
This DIP switch is unused and should be left inthe default up (off) position.
8
Control Panel DIP SwitchesThe up position for the DIP switch is OFF.
FunctionDIP4DIP3DIP2DIP1
User IP SettingsOFFOFF
Force DHCP IPONOFF
Force Static IP (192.168.0.129)OFFON
reservedONON
reservedOFF
reservedON
Default BootOFF
Boot from memory cardON
Note: When you force the static IP, the IP address that thecontrol panel expects to find the frame is also set(192.168.0.123).
To Run the Control Panel TestTest the functionality of any of the buttons, knobs orfader and positioner on the control panel.1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > Contrl Test.The second line of the display shows the currentbutton, knob, positioner, or fader being used.
2. Test the button, knob, positioner, and fader you wantto check.
3. Press the MENU and Exit buttons at the same timeto end the test.
To Run the LED Test1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > P-LEDs Test.All the buttons and indicators on the control panelcycle through different colors.
2. Press MENU to end the test.
To Run the Display Test1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > Disply Test.A series of letters, numbers, and symbols scrollacross the displays and the mnemonics cycle colors.
2. Press MENU to end the test.
To Run the Tally TestThe Tally Test turns all tallies off, and then turns eachtally on consecutively. There is a three (3) second delaybetween each tally being toggled on. Once the last tally
148 • Diagnostics and Calibration — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
has been turned on, all the tallies blink on and off threetimes.1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > NEXT > NEXT > Tally Test.All tallies are turned off, and then each tally is turnedon consecutively. There is a three (3) second delaybetween each tally being toggled on. Once the lasttally has been turned on, all the tallies blink on andoff three times.
2. Press MENU to end the test.
To Run the GPI Input Test1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > NEXT > NEXT > GPI Test.The second line of the menu show the state of allGPI input pins as High or Low.
2. Press MENU to end the test.
To Run the GPI Output Test1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Diag
Tests > NEXT > NEXT > GPO Test.All GPI outputs are turned off, and then each one isturned on consecutively. There is a three (3) seconddelay between each GPI output being triggered. Oncethe last tally has been triggered, all the GPI outputsblink on and off three times.
2. Press MENU to end the test.
Error MessagesThe following error messages may appear when startingyour switcher.
Table 14: Switcher Error Messages
SolutionDescriptionError
Re-start your switcher. Ifthe problem persists,contact Ross VideoTechnical Support forassistance.
There is a problem withthe switcher DDRmemory. The switchermay be used but manyfeatures will be limitedor disabled.
DDR 0 NotFound;DDR 1 NotFound; orDDR 0 & 1Not Found
Connect your switchercontrol panel to theproper frame and re-startthe switcher.
Your switcher controlpanel is connected tothe wrong frame type.
Panel/FrameMismatch
Allow the PMC upgradeto proceed. ContactRoss Video TechnicalSupport for assistance ifyou are unsure aboutupgrading your switcher.
Your switcher requires aPanel Module Controller(PMC) upgrade as partof a software upgrade.The switcher may beused without the PMCupgrade but mayrespond in anunpredictable manner.
UpgradePMC?
SolutionDescriptionError
Ensure that you have thecorrect control panelconnected to the frame.If the problem persists,download the latestupgrade file from andforce an upgrade of theswitcher. Contact RossVideo Technical Supportfor assistance if you areunsure about upgradingyour switcher.
The frame does notrecognise the controlpanel. This could becaused by anunsupported panel beingconnected to the frame,or a problem with thepanel module controlledor the configuration files.
Unknownpanel typePleaseupgrade
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Diagnostics and Calibration • 149
Switcher Soft ResetIf required, the switcher can be reset to return it to auser-defined default setting, or the factory default state.A reset can be performed for the entire switcher, orindividual components, such as keys.
Soft ResetThe software reset returns the switcher to the defaultstate. Black is selected on all buses, all keys are cutoff-air, and the transition rate is set back to default. Thisis useful if you need to return the switcher to a knownstate.
To Reset the Switcher Software1. Press and hold MENU.2. Press Reset All.
Custom Reset SettingsYou can customize many of the default switcherparameters and save them as a user-defined reset settings.These custom reset settings can then be recalled whenyou want to return the switcher to a previous state.
To Save a Custom Reset SettingThe Custom Reset Setting, or RState, saves how youwant the switcher to be configured when it powers up,or when you recall the RState manually.
You can customize many of the default switcherparameters and save them as a user-defined custom reset.
Tip: Custom reset settings can also be set from the Memory >RState tabs on the Live Assist node in DashBoard.
1. Press MENU > RESET > NEXT.2. Use the Attrib knob to select Media.3. Use the Media knob to select Media1.4. Use the Value knob to select whether the
Media-Store channel is reset with a switcher resetor not.• NoRst — the Media-Store channel is not reset• Reset — the Media-Store channel is reset with
a switcher reset
5. Repeat this for the remaining Media-Store channels.6. Use the Attrib knob to select Aux.7. Use the Aux knob to select Aux 1.8. Use the Value knob to select whether the Aux bus
is reset with a switcher reset or not.• NoRst — the Aux bus is not reset
• Reset — the Aux bus is reset with a switcherreset
9. Repeat this for the remaining Aux buses.10. Use the Value knob to select whether the Aux bus
is reset with a switcher reset or not.• NoRst — the Aux bus is not reset• Reset — the Aux bus is reset with a switcher
reset
11. Repeat this for the remaining Aux buses.12. Use the Attrib knob to select MiniME.13. Use the MiniME knob to select MME 1.14. Use theValue knob to select whether the MiniME™
is reset with a switcher reset or not.• NoRst — the MiniME™ is not reset• Reset — the MiniME™ is reset with a switcher
reset
15. Repeat this for the remaining MiniME™ outputs.16. Use the Attrib knob to select Canvas.17. Use the Canvas knob to select Can 1.18. Use the Value knob to select whether the Canvas
is reset with a switcher reset or not.• NoRst — the Canvas is not reset• Reset — the Canvas is reset with a switcher
reset
19. Repeat this for the remaining MiniME™ outputs.20. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.21. Press RState Save and Confrm.
To Load a Custom Reset SettingThe Custom Reset Setting, or RState, is recalled everytime the switcher is powered on, or it can be recalledmanually.
Tip: Custom reset settings can also be set from the Memory >RState tabs on the Live Assist node in DashBoard.
1. Press MENU > RESET.2. Press RState Load.
You can also press and holdMENU and pressResetAll.
Factory Default SettingsYou can restore the switcher to the factory default state.All installation and personality settings are reset.
To Factory Reset the SwitcherReturn the switcher to the factory default settings.
150 • Switcher Soft Reset — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
1. Press MENU > Reset > NEXT > NEXT > FactryReset.
2. Press the Confrm knob to load the factory defaultsettings.
Resetting Individual ComponentsYou can reset only the component that you want, insteadof the entire switcher. IndividualMEs, keys, aux buses,dissolves, wipes, and menu items can be reset.
Table 15: Resetting Individual Components
ResultButtons to PressToReset
all wipe parameters, includingposition, pattern, and border,are reset
WIPE and RESETWipes
all dissolve parameters arereset
DISS and RESETDissolves
key parameters for key Xincluding clip, gain, and mask,are reset, but not key type, orchroma key color selection(each keyer is resetindividually) (X is the numberof the key)
KEY X SEL andRESET
Keys
ME X parameters, includingsource selections, are reset(each ME is reset individually)(X is the number of the ME)
STORE andRECALL for theselected MEs
MEs
ME X STORE andME X RECALL(CB1 and CB2only)
Aux bus X parameters,including source selections, arereset (each Aux is resetindividually) (X is the numberof the aux bus)
AUX X and RESETAuxBuses
the value for that knob is resetdouble-press theknob for the valueyou want to reset
MenuItems
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Switcher Soft Reset • 151
SpecificationsThe information is this section is subject to changewithout notice.
ResourcesThe number of resources specific to your switcherdepends on the options installed.
UHDTV1SD/HDResource
1/21/3MEs (Min/Max)2
24MiniME™ Engines
4 + Trans4 + TransKeyers per ME
1121Canvas Generators
1/11/2Video Processor MultiViewer(Min/Max)2
0/11/2I/O MultiViewer (Min/Max)2
16MultiViewer Boxes
44MultiViewer Layouts
--38/34I/O Processor (Min/Max)2
24--3Input FSFCs/Output FCs (Min)
7+1 FC5--3Input FSFCs (Max)2
4--3Output FCs (Max)2
2/8--3Proc Amp/Color Correctors(Min/Max)2
282D DVE Channels Switcher Wide
28Aux Buses
24Chroma Keys (floating)
256 (8 Banks × 32 CCs)Custom Controls
998Max Events per CC
24GPI I/Os
2Matte Generators per ME
24Media-Store Channels (Video +Alpha)
8 GBMedia-Store CACHE
100Memories per ME
2Pattern Generators per ME
1 (Global)4(ME+Global)
Matte Generators
24Tallies
1824SDI Video Inputs
1014SDI Video Outputs
192.168.0.123Frame IP (default)
UHDTV1SD/HDResource
192.168.0.129Panel/CarboNET IP (default)
Notes:1 Each Canvas consumes MiniME™ engines to generatethe output. The number of Canvas outputs that areavailable depends on the number of MiniME™ enginesthat are available.2 Software options are required to be installed to activatethe maximum number of resources.3 In SD/HD, the total number of color correctors, inputFSFCs, and output FCs is shared. In UHDTV1 there arededicated color corrector, input FSFC, and output FCresources.4 There are 2 FSFCs that are shared between inputs andoutputs.5 Input FC 8 can only be used to up-convert HD videosignals to UHDTV1. You cannot use this resource toframe-sync a UHDTV1 video signal.
Hardware WeightsWeightHardware
13 lbs (5.90 kg)CB1 Panel
17 lbs (7.71 kg)CB1S Panel
20 lbs (9.07 kg)CB2 Panel
26 lbs (11.79 kg)CB2S Panel
35 lbs (15.88 kg)CB3S Panel
40 lbs (18.14 kg)CB3X Panel
8 lbs (3.63 kg)CB9 Panel
13 lbs (5.90 kg)Ultra
Environmental CharacteristicsAll Switchers
0 - 40°C (32 - 104°F)Ambient Temperature Range
Active, Front-to-Back airflowFrame Cooling
PassiveControl Panel Cooling
Video Input SpecificationsValueInput Specification
UHDTV1 50/59.94/60 (UHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 Video Formats
152 • Specifications — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
ValueInput Specification
1080p 25/29.97/50/59.941080pSF 23.98/25/29.971080i 50/59.94720p 50/59.94
HD Video Formats
480i, 576iSD Video Formats
• Standard Dynamic Range(SDR)
• Hybrid Log Gamma (HLG)• Perceptual Quantizer (PQ)• Sony® S-Log3.
Dynamic Range Support(UHDTV1 only)
• BT.709• BT.2020
Color Gamut Support(UHDTV1 only)
>40m @ 12Gb/sEqualization (using Belden1694 cable)
>50m @ 3Gb/s
>100m @ 1.5 Gb/s
>300m @ 270 Mb/s (5°-40°C)
75 ohm, terminatingImpedance
SMPTE259M/292M/424M/ST-2082(non-looping)
Video Inputs, SDI
Standard Definition — analogblack
Reference Inputs (terminating)
High Definition— tri-level sync
Video Output SpecificationsValueOutput Specification
UHDTV1 50/59.94/60 (UHD-2SI)
UHDTV1 Video Formats
1080p 25/29.97/50/59.941080pSF 23.98/25/29.971080i 50/59.94720p 50/59.94
HD Video Formats
480i, 576iSD Video Formats
<-7.8dB @ 12GHzReturn Loss
<-10dB @ 3GHz
<-15dB @ 1.5GHz
26ps ±10% (UHD)Rise and Fall Time
240ps ±10% (HD)
800ps ±10% (SD)
800mV ±10%Signal Level
0 VoltsDC Offset
<10%Overshoot
10-bit SMPTE-292M/424Mserial digital
Video Outputs, SDI HD Mode
ValueOutput Specification
SMPTE ST 2082-1:2015(Amendment 1:2016)
Video Outputs, SDI UHDTV1Mode
Audio SpecificationsValueSpecification
24-bit AES3 in HD (20-bit inSD)
Audio Depth
1 Stereo Pair (2 channels)Channels
AESOutput
Multi-channel Waveform AudioFile (.wav)
File Format
110 Ohms, differentialImpedance
1.5/6V peak-to-peakMinimum/Maximum outputvoltage swing
20ns, typicalRise and Fall Times
48kHzSample Rate
Locked to VideoSynchronization
JitterValueSpecification
Alignment (> 100KHz) < 0.21UIUHD - Tri-Level Sync
Timing (<10Hz) < 1.84UI
Performance not guaranteedwith composite reference
UHD - Composite Reference
Alignment (> 100KHz) < 0.2UIHD - Tri-Level Sync
Timing (<10Hz) < 1.0UI
Performance not guaranteedwith composite reference
HD - Composite Reference
Alignment (> 1KHz) < 0.2UISD - Tri-Level Sync
Timing (<10Hz) < 0.2UI
Alignment (> 1KHz) < 0.2UISD - Composite Reference
Timing (<10Hz) < 0.5UI
System Timing• All video inputs zero time relative to reference input,
auto timing will correct for inputs out of time by upto +/- 0.25 line.
• System delay is less than 1 line.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Specifications • 153
Power Consumption—Control PanelCB3XCB3SCB2SCB2CB1SCB1CB9
80W6.7A12V
65W5.4A12V
45W3.8A12V
35W2.9A12V
30W2.5A12V
25W2.1A12V
24W2A12V
Power
100 - 120V~, 220 - 240V~, 47-63HzInputVoltage
Power Consumption — FrameUltra
114W 7.6A 15VConsumption
100 - 120V~, 220 - 240V~,47-63Hz
Input Voltage
154 • Specifications — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Ports
Serial PortThe serial port supports the RS-422 transmission standardin the following format:• 38.4k Baud• 8 bits• 1 stop bit• Even Parity
Table 16: Serial Port Pinouts
SignalPin
Tx+1
Tx-2
Rx+3
n/c4
n/c5
Rx-6
Ground7
Ground8
GPI PortThe switcher supports 24 GPI I/Os.
Table 17: GPI I/O Pinouts
SignalPin
GPI I/O 11
GPI I/O 22
GPI I/O 33
GPI I/O 44
GPI I/O 55
GPI I/O 66
GPI I/O 77
GPI I/O 88
GPI I/O 99
GPI I/O 1010
GPI I/O 1111
GPI I/O 1212
SignalPin
GPI I/O 1313
GPI I/O 1414
GPI I/O 1515
GPI I/O 1616
GPI I/O 1717
GPI I/O 1818
GPI I/O 1919
GPI I/O 2020
GPI I/O 2121
GPI I/O 2222
GPI I/O 2323
GPI I/O 2424
Ground25
Tally PortThe switcher supports 24 fixed tallies.
Table 18: Tally Rating
ValueSpecification
24VAC(rms)/40VDCInput Voltage
120mAMaximum Current
<15 ohmImpedance
Table 19: Tally Pinouts
Tally #Pin
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
1010
1111
1212
1313
1414
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Ports • 155
Tally #Pin
1515
1616
1717
1818
1919
2020
2121
2222
2323
2424
Common25
AES PortThe AES ports on the back of the frame each support asingle 24-bit (20-bit in SD) stereo pair.
LTC PortThe LTC port on the back of the frame supports a singleLTC connection.
156 • Ports — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
GlossaryInterlaced
An Interlaced video format starts at the top of the screenand draws all the odd number scan lines and then all theeven number scan lines in sequence. This results in halfthe image being drawn in one pass and the other half ofthe image being drawn in the second. These two passesare called Fields, where the first pass is called Field 1and the second pass is called Field 2. When both Field1 and Field 2 have been drawn, resulting in a completeimage, you have a single Frame.
ProgressiveA Progressive scan video format draws each scan line insequence, starting from the top of the screen and workingto the bottom. Unlike Interlaced, with Progressive scanthe entire image is drawn at one time, in a single pass.This means that there are no fields in a Progressive scanimage.
Auto KeyA pairing of two video signals, a key video and a keyalpha, to create a key. In the switcher, you associate thefill and alpha so that the switcher knows which alpha touse when the video is selected.
Auto TransitionAn automatic transition in which the manual movementof the fader handle is simulated electronically. Thetransition starts when the AUTO TRANS button ispressed and takes place over a pre-selected time period,measured in frames.
Chroma KeyChroma Key is a key in which the hole is cut based ona color value, or hue, rather than a luminance value oralpha signal. The color is removed and replaced withbackground video from another source.
CutAn instantaneous switch from one video signal to another.
DissolveA transition from one video signal to another in whichone signal is faded down, while the other issimultaneously faded up. The terms mix or cross-fadeare often used interchangeably with dissolve.
FieldOne half of a complete picture (or frame) intervalcontaining all of the odd, or all of the even, lines in
interlaced scanning. One scan of a TV screen is called afield; two fields are required to make a complete picture(which is a frame).
Force, MaskAn effect that forces the masked region to the foregroundbut is not bound by the key. For example, if you have akey and apply a mask to it. The masked area is bound bythe edges of the key. When force is turned on, the maskedarea is filled with the video from the key (nothing appearsmasked) but you can move the mask outside of the keyand the key video is still filling the masked region.
FrameOne complete picture consisting of two fields ofinterlaced scanning lines.
File Transfer ProtocolA network protocol that is used to transfer files from onehost computer to another over a TCP-based network.
GainGain represents the range of signal values present in avideo signal from a lowest to a highest point (from blackto white for example). Increasing gain expands this range,while decreasing gain compresses this range. Clippingoccurs if applied gain changes cause output signal valuesto fall outside the allowable range. Generally, increasingthe gain for a specific color component causes the videosignal colors to become increasingly saturated with thatcolor. Similarly, decreasing the gain for a specific colorcomponent progressively removes that color componentfrom the output video signal.
GammaGamma corrections introduce non-linear corrections toa video signal. A gamma correction can be described astaking a point on the output versus input video signalline and pulling it perpendicularly away from the line.The result is a Bezier curve between the start, the newpoint, and the end point. Generally, increasing the gammavalue adds more of the component to the video signal inthe location of the gamma offset point. Decreasing thegamma value reduces the amount of the component inthe video signal in the location of the gamma offset point.Moving the gamma offset point allows you to selectwhich part of the input video signal receives the gammacorrection. For example, if you increase the red gammacorrection to the part of the video signal that has no redcomponent you will add red to those areas while havinglittle effect on areas that already contain a significantamount of red. This allows you to add a red tint to the
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Glossary • 157
image while minimizing the amount of red-clipping thatoccurs.
General Purpose InterfaceA simple high/low signal that is used to trigger an actioneither on an external device or on the switcher. A GPIcan be an input or an output to the switcher.
High DefinitionA high definition (720p, 1080i, or 1080p/3G) videosignal.
HueThe characteristic of a color signal that determineswhether the color is red, yellow, green, blue, purple, etc.(the three characteristics of a TV color signal arechrominance, luminance, and hue). White, black, andgray are not considered hues.
Hue RotationHue rotate affects the color of the entire video signal byrotating the input video hues. This produces an outputvideo signal with colors that are shifted from theiroriginal hues. By rotating colors around the wheel, huevalues will shift. For example, a clockwise rotation whereyellows become orange, reds become magenta, bluesbecome green. The more rotation applied, the furtheraround the wheel colors are shifted.
KeyAn effect produced by cutting a hole in the backgroundvideo, then filling the hole with video or matte fromanother source. Key source video cuts the hole, key fillvideo fills the hole. The video signal used for cut and fillcan come from the same, or separate, sources.
Key AlphaThe video signal which cuts a hole in the backgroundvideo to make a key effect possible. Also called KeyVideo or Source. In practice, this signal controls whena video mixer circuit will switch from background to keyfill video.
Key InvertAn effect that reverses the polarity of the key source sothat the holes in the background are cut by dark areas ofthe key source instead of bright areas.
Key MaskA keying technique in which a shape is combined withthe key source to block out unwanted portions of the keysource.
Key VideoA video input which is timed to fill the hole provided bythe key source video. An example of key video is thevideo output of a character generator.
Linear KeyLinear keys make it possible to fully specify thetransparency of a key from opaque, through transparent,to fully off. The transparency is specified by the keyalpha that is associated with the key video. A keyercapable of a linear key converts the key signal voltagedirectly to the transparency effect on the screen.
MnemonicsA green, orange, or yellow display used to show thenames of a source above or below the source button orused as a custom command or pattern button.
OffsetsOffsets shift the video signal by a set amount. Dependingon the offset applied, different parts or all of the videosignal may be affected. Clipping occurs if applied offsetscause output signal values to fall outside the allowablerange.
Pre-DelayA pre-delay is a delay that is inserted into a transitionbetween the triggering of a GPI output and performingthe transition. The length of the pre-delay is usually thelength of time your video server requires to start playinga clip or your character generator required to load a page.
RossTalkAn ethernet based protocol that allows the control overRoss devices using plain english commands.
Standard-DefinitionA standard definition (480i or 576i) video signal.
Self KeyA key effect in which the same video signal serves asboth the key signal and key fill.
Shaped KeyAn additive key where the Key Alpha cuts a hole basedon the monochrome value of the alpha. Shades of grayare translated into either white or black, giving the keya hard edge. Shaped Key alphas are sometimes used withCharacter Generators to cut very precise holes for thefill.
158 • Glossary — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Split KeyA Split key allows you to assign a different alpha sourcefor a key than the fill/alpha associations that are set upduring configuration or to use a separate alpha sourcefor a Self key.
TallyAn indicator which illuminates when the associatedbutton, or control, is selected or is on-air.
Unshaped KeyA multiplicative key where the Key Alpha cuts a holebased on the gradient values of the alpha. Shades of grayare translated into transparency levels, giving the key asoft edge. Unshaped Key alphas can also be consideredtrue linear alphas.
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Glossary • 159
Index
AAbort TransitionAES OutAES OutputAllocated DVEsAncillary DataAncillary ModeAnimationsAspect Ratio Conversion
FullLetterboxPillarboxZoom
AudioAudio Mixer ControlAudio Out, Media-StoreAudio Output, Media-StoreAuto KeyAuto Select KeysAuto Trans Second Press
BBackground Double-PressBlackStorm ControlBus HoldBus MapsBus Select Buttons
ViewControlButton Inserts
CCalibrationCamera ControlCapture Thumbnail, Clip PlayerChroma KeyClean FeedClean Feed, Layer ModeClear MemoriesClip NamesClip Player
AudioCapture ThumbnailFile NamesSupported Formats
Color CorrectionProc AmpRGB
Color SchemesControl Panel
AreasControl Panel, TopControl, External DevicesCopy Keys
Copy LogsCopy MEsCPU TemperatureCustom Control Buttons
ViewControlCustom Control Event
Ancillary Data ModeAudio PanAudio VolumeAuto TransBox Mask Edge PositionBox Mask Edge SoftnessBus SourceCancel All CCCancel CCChroma Key ColorChroma Key InitializeChroma Key ModeChroma Key ParametersClean FeedColor Corrector Color ResetColor Corrector EnableColor Corrector Gain ParameterColor Corrector Gamma Offset ParameterColor Corrector Gamma ParameterColor Corrector Lower Offset ParameterColor Corrector Offset ParameterColor Corrector ResetCut TransitionDVE Key AspectDVE Key BorderDVE Key Border Color (HSL)DVE Key Border Color (Preset)DVE Key Crop (Bottom Edge)DVE Key Crop (Dual Edge)DVE Key Crop (Left Edge)DVE Key Crop (Right Edge)DVE Key Crop (Top Edge)DVE Key Edge SoftnessDVE Key SizeDVE Key X-PositionDVE Key Y-PositionDVE Wipe DirectionDVE Wipe Direction (Flip-Flop)DVE Wipe PatternDVE Wipe, ResetEmbeddedTriggers — EnableEmbeddedTriggers — InsertEmbeddedTriggers — Set DIDEmbeddedTriggers — Set LineEmbeddedTriggers — Set Remote IDEmbeddedTriggers — Set SDIDFly Key (DVE)GPI Output — Edge Trigger SetupGPI Output — Level Trigger SetupGPI Output — ModeGPI Output — Trigger
160 • Index — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Custom Control Event (continued)GPI Output — Trigger TypeHold CCI/O Proc AssignmentInput FSFC AssignmentInput FSFC FramingKey ActiveKey CopyKey InvertKey ModeKey Only TransitionKey Settings (Clip, Gain, Transparency)Key Trans RateKey TypeKey, Make LinearKey, ResetLayer ModeLoop CCMaskMask (Box) — Left Edge PositionMask (Box) — Right Edge PositionMask (Box) — SizeMask (Box) — Top Edge PositionMask (Box) — X-PositionMask (Box) — Y-PositionMask (Pattern) — Aspect RatioMask (Pattern) — Border SizeMask (Pattern) — Edge SoftnessMask (Pattern) — Horizontal MultiplicationMask (Pattern) — PatternMask (Pattern) — ResetMask (Pattern) — RotationMask (Pattern) — SizeMask (Pattern) — Vertical MultiplicationMask (Pattern) — X-PositionMask (Pattern) — Y-PositionMask, ForceMask, InvertMask, ResetMatte Color (HSL)Matte Color (Preset)Matte Color, ResetME CopyME Trans RateME Trans TypeMedia Cut Point, SetMedia Trans End Point, SetMedia Trans Start Point, SetMedia Trans ThumbnailMedia-Store — Auto PlayMedia-Store — CaptureMedia-Store — Capture AlphaMedia-Store — Capture Alpha SourceMedia-Store — Capture ModeMedia-Store — Capture SourceMedia-Store — Clear ChannelMedia-Store — Cut FrameMedia-Store — Delete CaptureMedia-Store — LoadMedia-Store — LoopingMedia-Store — Move To Frame
Custom Control Event (continued)Media-Store — MuteMedia-Store — PlayMedia-Store — Play SpeedMedia-Store — Reset MediaMedia-Store — ReverseMedia-Store — RewindMedia-Store — ShapedMedia-Store — Triger GPI Output DelayMedia-Store — Trigger GPI OutputMedia-Store — X-PositionMedia-Store — Y-PositionMediaWipe — ChannelMediaWipe — DirectionMediaWipe — Direction, Flip-FlopMediaWipe — LayerMemory RecallMultiViewer — ClipMultiViewer — FSFC LabelMultiViewer — LayoutMultiViewer — OutputsMultiViewer — Tally DisplayMultiViewer Box — Aspect Ratio MarkersMultiViewer Box — BorderMultiViewer Box — Green Tally (Preview)MultiViewer Box — LabelMultiViewer Box — Label ModeMultiViewer Box — Label PositionMultiViewer Box — Label TransparencyMultiViewer Box — Red Tally (On-Air)MultiViewer Box — Video SourceMultiViewer Clock — Background Color (HSL)MultiViewer Clock — Background Color (Preset)MultiViewer Clock — Foreground Color (HSL)MultiViewer Clock — Foreground Color (Preset)MultiViewer Clock — FormatMultiViewer Clock — ModeMultiViewer Clock — SizeMultiViewer Clock — Timecode Frame CountMultiViewer Clock — X-PositionOutput BNC AssignmentOutput FSFC FramingOutput FSFC Video FormatPause CCPBus — RecallPBus — TriggerPersonality — Auto Remove KeyPersonality — Auto Trans Second Press (Key)Personality — Auto Trans Second Press (ME)Personality — Next Trans ResetPersonality — Roll ClipPlay CCProc Amp Black Level ParameterProc Amp Cb Gain ParameterProc Amp Cb Offset ParameterProc Amp Chrominance Gain ParameterProc Amp Cr Gain ParameterProc Amp Cr Offset ParameterProc Amp EnableProc Amp Gain ParameterProc Amp Gamma Offset Parameter
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Index • 161
Custom Control Event (continued)Proc Amp Gamma ParameterProc Amp Hue RotationProc Amp Luminance Gain ParameterProc Amp ResetProc Amp/Color Corrector ResetReference SourceResetResume CCRobotic Camera — Halt AllRobotic Camera — Recall ShotRobotic Camera — Recall Shot FastRobotic Camera — Store ShotRoll ClipRossTalk — CCRossTalk — Clear AllRossTalk — Clear ChannelRossTalk — Clear LayerRossTalk — Cue ChannelRossTalk — Cue CurrentRossTalk — Cue ItemRossTalk — Cue LayerRossTalk — FocusRossTalk — GPIRossTalk — Layer OffRossTalk — MV Clock EndRossTalk — MV Clock PauseRossTalk — MV Clock RunRossTalk — MV Clock StopRossTalk — NextRossTalk — Read CurrentRossTalk — Read ItemRossTalk — Read LayerRossTalk — Resume ChannelRossTalk — Resume LayerRossTalk — SalvoRossTalk — Sequencer DownRossTalk — Sequencer UpRossTalk — Swap ChannelRossTalk — Swap CurrentRossTalk — Swap LayerRossTalk — Take ChannelRossTalk — Take ItemRossTalk — Take LayerRossTalk — Take OfflineRossTalk — Up NextRossTalk Custom CommandRState, LoadSource SubstitutionSource Substitution, DeleteState, InsertSwitching FieldTrans ClearTrans ElementsTrans Limit — On/OffTrans Limit — ResetTrans Limit — SetTrans Limit — ValueVideo ModeVideo Server — CueVideo Server — Get Clips
Custom Control Event (continued)Video Server — JogVideo Server — Loop OffVideo Server — Loop OnVideo Server — PlayVideo Server — RecordVideo Server — ShuttleVideo Server — StopWash Color (HSL)Wash Color (Preset)Wash Color ResetWash Generator — DisableWash Generator — EnableWipe DirectionWipe Direction (Flip-Flop)Wipe Pattern — Aspect RatioWipe Pattern — Border Color (HSL)Wipe Pattern — Border Color (Preset)Wipe Pattern — Border SizeWipe Pattern — Edge SoftnessWipe Pattern — Horizontal MultiplicationWipe Pattern — PatternWipe Pattern — RotationWipe Pattern — SizeWipe Pattern — Vertical MultiplicationWipe Pattern — X-PositionWipe Pattern — Y-PositionWipe Reset
Custom ControlsCopyDashBoardDelete EventDeletingEditingEventsInsert EventNamingPasteRecordingRun EventRunningSetupSpecial Functions
CancelCancelAllCutKeyGPOHoldIncKeyLoopPauseResumeStateTrnKey
Custom Controls (CC)Cut Transitions
DDashBoard
Configuration
162 • Index — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
DashBoard (continued)Custom ControlsLive AssistMediaManagerPanelPaneLINKStatus
Date, System TimeDefault
FactoryDefault IP AddressDelete MemoryDelete Memory BankDeleting a StillDevice ControlDiagnosticsDiagnostics, Copy LogsDiagnostics, Software VersionDIP SwitchesDissolve TransitionsDouble-Press RateDVE
KeyCroppingFreeze
DVE AllocationDVE Transitions
EEditing Custom ControlsEditor ModeEFF DISSEFF RATEEffects Dissolve
DurationEngine TypeExternal Reference
FFactory DefaultFade to BlackFan#1 OKFan#2 OKFan#3 OKField DominanceFlexiCleanFly KeyFormat ConversionFPGA TemperatureFrame Setup, EthernetFrame SynchronizerFreezeFSFC, InputFSFC, OutputFTP Connection
GGlowGPIGPI, Assign to SourceGPI, NEXT Button TriggerGPI, SetupGPO Tally
HHelp
IIndexInput FSFCInputs
VideoIO Processor
KKey ModeKey RATEKey SwapKeyer Transition Buttons
ViewControlKeying
Auto SelectChroma KeyCroppingDVEFreezeInvertKey PriorityMaskMenu OverviewSelf KeySplitSplit Keys
Keying, Copying
LLayer ModeLicensesLive Assist
PaneLINKLiveEDLLiveEDL, CaptureLiveEDL, StoreLoad Custom ResetLoading Media-Store Images
MMaskMattes
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Index • 163
MESelection
ME CopyingME RATEME Select, PersonalityMedia Manager
PlaylistCollapseDeleteExpandLoadNewNextPreviousSave
Media TransitionsMedia-Store
AnimationsAudioFile SpecificationsLoading
Media-Store, Audio OutMedia-Store, CaptureMediaManager
connection statusDashBoardEjectFlip FloploginLoopingMenu BarPlayPlaylist
Move DownMove Up
PlaylistsRe-Cue
MediaManager GUIlayouts
MemoriesAccess ModeAttributesBus HoldEffects DissolveMemoryAIRecall ModeStoring
Memories, clearMemory AIMemory Bank ButtonMemory Bank, DeleteMemory UndoMemory Undo, Personality OptionMemory, DeleteMenus
Auto-FollowNavigatingOverview
MiniMESelection
Mnemonic Source Names
MultiScreenMultiScreen, Substitution TableMultiViewerMultiViewer FormatsMultiViewer, Time-Clock
NNetwork Connection
Panel SetupNetwork PortsNEXT Button FunctionNext Trans ResetNext Trans Toggle
OOn-Air SettingOutput FSFCOutput SynchronizerOutputs, VideoOverview, Control Panel
PPanel, DashBoardPanelBuilderPaneLINKPatternsPersonality
Auto Trans Second PressBackground Double-PressBGDDblDblPrs SpeedDouble-Press RateEditorEditor ModeKAuto 2MAuto 2Next Trans ResetPower-Save ModeRemKeyRlClipRoll GPOSleep/PwrSveTransTransition Area
Auto Remove KeyPersonality, ME SelectPersonality, Memory Bank ButtonPersonality, NEXT ButtonPersonality, Next Trans TogglePersonality, Shift TogglePersonality, Transition Rate UnitsPersonality, Undo MemoryPower ConnectedPower-Save ModePre-Delay OverridePreviewProc Amp
164 • Index — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
QQuadFS
RRe-EntryReal-Time Clock, SystemRecall ModeReference
ExternalInternalOutput SyncVideo Switching Field
Reference OKReference SourceReset
CustomLoadingSaving
IndividualReset SoftwareRGBRoboCam ControlRoll ClipRoll GPORossLinqRossTalk PortRState, LoadRState, Save
SSave Custom ResetSDI-FSSDR/HDR ConversionSelf KeySerial NumberServer ControlSets
LoadingStoring
Setup, External DevicesShift ToggleShow AlphaSoftPanel
Bus AreaControl AreaMenu AreaUser Area
Software OptionsSoftware VersionSource Button NamesSource NamesSources
SelectingSources, LayeringSources, Re-EntrySpecifications
GPI I/O
Specifications (continued)Serial PortTally
Split KeySplit KeysStatusStoring MemoriesSubstitution Table, MultiScreenSwitcher ModeSwitching FieldSystem Real-Time Clock
TTalliesTallies, GPOTemperature OKTime-ClockTimecodeTrans ClearTransition
Flip-FlopPre-Delay Override
Transition AreaAuto Remove Key
Transition ButtonsViewControl
Transition LimitTransition RateTransition Rate UnitsTransitions
AbortingCutsDirectionDissolvesDVEFlip-FlopGPO TriggerLimitMediaMenu OverviewPausePerformingRateRoll ClipWipes
Trigger GPOTSL UMDTSL UMD Port
UUndoUser Buttons
VVideo Inputs
Auto KeyButton Names
Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0) — Index • 165
Video Inputs, GPI Device ControlVideo Inputs, NamesVideo LayeringVideo Mode
SetupVideo Output, Ancillary DataVideo Output, Clean FeedVideo Output, MultiViewerVideo OutputsVideo Processing and FlowVideo Server ControlVideo Source, Bus MapVideo Sources
SelectingViewControl
Bus Selection Buttons
ViewControl (continued)Button SetupCustom Control ButtonsKeyer Transition ButtonsTransition Buttons
WWashesWCG ConversionWhiteFlashWipe Transitions
XXPression Control
166 • Index — Carbonite Ultra User Manual (v3.0)
Related Documents
